WO2011024891A1 - Dichroic dye composition, polarizing film, liquid crystal cells and display devices - Google Patents

Dichroic dye composition, polarizing film, liquid crystal cells and display devices Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011024891A1
WO2011024891A1 PCT/JP2010/064468 JP2010064468W WO2011024891A1 WO 2011024891 A1 WO2011024891 A1 WO 2011024891A1 JP 2010064468 W JP2010064468 W JP 2010064468W WO 2011024891 A1 WO2011024891 A1 WO 2011024891A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
carbon atoms
dichroic dye
substituted
general formula
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2010/064468
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
亮司 後藤
伸卓 岩橋
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2011024891A1 publication Critical patent/WO2011024891A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K19/00Liquid crystal materials
    • C09K19/52Liquid crystal materials characterised by components which are not liquid crystals, e.g. additives with special physical aspect: solvents, solid particles
    • C09K19/60Pleochroic dyes
    • C09K19/601Azoic
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B31/00Disazo and polyazo dyes of the type A->B->C, A->B->C->D, or the like, prepared by diazotising and coupling
    • C09B31/02Disazo dyes
    • C09B31/04Disazo dyes from a coupling component "C" containing a directive amino group
    • C09B31/043Amino-benzenes
    • C09B31/047Amino-benzenes containing acid groups, e.g. —CO2H, —SO3H, —PO3H2, —OSO3H, —OPO2H2; Salts thereof
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B43/00Preparation of azo dyes from other azo compounds
    • C09B43/30Preparation of azo dyes from other azo compounds by esterification of —COOH or —SO3H groups
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B43/00Preparation of azo dyes from other azo compounds
    • C09B43/32Preparation of azo dyes from other azo compounds by reacting carboxylic or sulfonic groups, or derivatives thereof, with amines; by reacting keto-groups with amines
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • G02B5/223Absorbing filters containing organic substances, e.g. dyes, inks or pigments
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/30Polarising elements
    • G02B5/3025Polarisers, i.e. arrangements capable of producing a definite output polarisation state from an unpolarised input state
    • G02B5/3033Polarisers, i.e. arrangements capable of producing a definite output polarisation state from an unpolarised input state in the form of a thin sheet or foil, e.g. Polaroid

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a dichroic dye composition useful for forming a film for various uses such as a polarizing film, and a polarizing film formed using the same.
  • the present invention also relates to a liquid crystal cell and a liquid crystal display device having the polarizing film.
  • a polarizing element formed using an organic dichroic dye has been studied.
  • an organic dye having a dichroism (dichroic dye) is dissolved or adsorbed in a polymer material such as polyvinyl alcohol, and the film is formed into a film in one direction.
  • a polarizer prepared by stretching and orienting a dichroic dye has been proposed.
  • a process such as a stretching process is troublesome. Therefore, other methods have recently attracted attention.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 a dichroic dye is oriented on a substrate such as glass or transparent film by utilizing intermolecular interaction of organic dye molecules, and a polarizing film (anisotropic dye film) is formed. There is a method of forming. However, the method described in this document has a problem of heat resistance.
  • Patent Documents 1 to 3 propose materials suitable for the above process.
  • Patent Document 4 proposes a dye represented by (chromogen) (SO 3 M) n.
  • a polarizing film used therefor is also required to achieve a high degree of polarization with a thin film thickness.
  • this characteristic is strongly required for the polarizing layer disposed in the cell.
  • a dichroic dye composition that exhibits a high dichroic ratio and good orientation is effective.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a dichroic dye composition having a high dichroic ratio and good orientation.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a dichroic dye composition useful for producing a polarizing film capable of achieving a high degree of polarization with a thin film thickness.
  • this invention makes it a subject to provide a dichroic dye composition useful for formation of the polarizing film arrange
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a polarizing film capable of achieving a high degree of polarization with a thin film thickness, a liquid crystal cell having the polarizing film, and a display device.
  • Dichroic dye composition containing at least one dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (I):
  • each of Ar 1 to Ar 4 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group and a cyclohexane ring group, each of which may have a substituent;
  • L 1 and L 2 are an azo group and an ester group, respectively.
  • the dichroic dye composition according to [1] which does not substantially contain a liquid crystalline non-colored material.
  • [3] The dichroic dye composition of [1] or [2], wherein at least one of the dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) is a compound represented by the following general formula (II): : Wherein, L 11 and L 12 are each, azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group, provided that never L 11 and L 12 is an azo group together; R 11 ⁇ R 15 each Represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 11 and R 13 may form a ring with each other; A 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • [4] It contains at least two dichroic dyes having liquid crystallinity represented by the general formula (II), and at least one of the two or more dichroic dyes is represented by the formula (II)
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 21 , R 22 , R 31 and R 32 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
  • R 13 , R 23 and R 33 are each R 14 , R 24 , R 34 , R 15 , R 25, and R 35 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a plurality of carbon atoms having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • An alkoxy group which may contain a hetero atom; A 1 , A 2 and A 3 may contain a nitrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a plurality of hetero atoms
  • the dichroic dye composition according to [8] containing at least one compound represented by formula (III) as a yellow dye.
  • a polarizing film comprising the dichroic dye composition according to any one of [1] to [11].
  • Dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (III):
  • L 21 represents an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group
  • L 22 represents an azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group
  • R 11 to R 15 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R 11 and R 13 may form a ring with each other
  • a 2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • R 21 and R 22 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
  • R 23 is a hydrogen atom;
  • R 24 and R 25 are a hydrogen atom or a carbon atom, respectively.
  • a 2 is a nitrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
  • the dichroic dye according to [19] which is a substituted alkyl group, a carbon atom substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group, which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms.
  • R 31 and R 32 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
  • R 33 is a hydrogen atom;
  • R 34 and R 35 are a hydrogen atom and a carbon atom, respectively.
  • a 3 is a nitrogen atom, or substituted or unsubstituted having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
  • the dichroic dye of [21] which is a carbon atom substituted with an alkyl group, a plurality of heteroatoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group.
  • the dichroic dye composition of the present invention exhibits a high dichroic ratio and good orientation. Therefore, according to the dichroic dye composition of the present invention, a polarizing film capable of achieving a high degree of polarization with a thin film thickness can be provided. Moreover, according to this invention, the dichroic dye composition useful for formation of the polarizing film arrange
  • Dichroic dye composition -1 Dichroic dye
  • the present invention relates to a dichroic dye composition containing at least one dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (I).
  • each of Ar 1 to Ar 4 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group and a cyclohexane ring group, each of which may have a substituent;
  • L 1 and L 2 are an azo group and an ester group, respectively.
  • Ar 1 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent; it may be a phenyl group or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent. Is more preferable; it is more preferably a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent of Ar 1 include a substituted or unsubstituted amino group (preferably an amino group having 0 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 0 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 0 to 6 carbon atoms, For example, an unsubstituted amino group, a methylamino group, a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, an anilino group, etc.), a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, especially Preferably, it has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a butoxy group); a substituted or unsubstituted amino group is more preferable.
  • Ar 1 is preferably a phenyl group having a substituted or unsubstituted amino group at the para position relative to the azo group, and is preferably unsubstituted except for
  • Ar 2 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent; an phenylene group or a naphthylene group which may have a substituent is more preferable; A phenylene group which may have a substituent is more preferable.
  • substituent that Ar 2 has include an optionally substituted alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms).
  • alkoxy group which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, for example, the alkoxy group containing a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group heteroatoms such, -.
  • OX N represents an integer of 1 to 10, preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and X represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • a halogen atom for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom
  • a hydroxy group are preferable; among them, an alkyl group and an alkoxy group which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms are more preferable.
  • Ar 2 is preferably an unsubstituted phenylene group or a phenylene group having an alkyl group.
  • Ar 3 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic heterocyclic group or cyclohexane ring group which may have a substituent; a phenylene group or naphthylene which may have a substituent; A group is more preferable; a phenylene group which may have a substituent is more preferable.
  • substituents which Ar 2 has are the same as examples of the substituent Ar 2 has preferred ranges are also the same.
  • Ar 4 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group or a cyclohexane ring group which may have a substituent; a phenyl group or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent Or a pyridyl group is more preferable; a phenyl group or a pyridyl group which may have a substituent is more preferable.
  • substituent that Ar 4 has include an alkyl group which may have a substituent (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms).
  • alkenyl group preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, etc.
  • alkynyl group preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferred
  • alkynyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms such as a propargyl group or 3-pentynyl group
  • an aryl group preferably having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, particularly preferably Is an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a 2,6-diethylphenyl group, a 3,5-ditrifluoromethylphenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a biphenyl group
  • substituted or unsubstituted Amino group preferably an amino group having 0 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 0 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 0 to 6 carbon atoms, such as an unsubstituted
  • an alkoxy group containing a hetero atom for example, — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) an oligoethyleneoxy group represented by n OX, n represents an integer of 1 to 10, preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and X is a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1
  • an alkoxycarbonyl group preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as a methoxycarbonyl group and an ethoxycarbonyl group).
  • Acyloxy groups preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as acetoxy group, Oxy group and the like
  • acylamino group preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as acetylamino group and benzoylamino group.
  • An alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as a methoxycarbonylamino group), aryloxy A carbonylamino group (preferably having a carbon number of 7 to 20, more preferably a carbon number of 7 to 16, particularly preferably a carbon number of 7 to 12, such as a phenyloxycarbonylamino group), a sulfonylamino group (preferably Has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • methanesulfonylamino group, benzenesulfonylamino group, etc. sulfamoyl group (preferably having 0 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 0 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 0 to 6 carbon atoms, A sulfamoyl group, a methylsulfamoyl group, a dimethylsulfamoyl group, a phenylsulfamoyl group, etc.), a carbamoyl group (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably carbon atoms).
  • an unsubstituted carbamoyl group a methylcarbamoyl group, a diethylcarbamoyl group, a phenylcarbamoyl group and the like, an alkylthio group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 20, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 10, particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, such as methylthio group, ethyl
  • an alkylthio group preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 16 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a phenylthio group
  • sulfonyl A group preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as mesyl group and tosyl group
  • sulfinyl group preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms
  • a phosphoric acid amide group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 20, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 10, particularly preferably a carbon number of 1 to 6, such as a diethylphosphoric acid amide group, phenyl Phosphoric acid amide group etc.), hydroxy group, mercapto group, halogen atom (eg fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), cyano group, nitro group, hydroxamic acid group, sulfino group, hydrazino group, imino group Group, a heterocyclic group (preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, for example, a heterocyclic group having a hetero atom such as a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, Imidazolyl, pyridyl, quinolyl, furyl, piperidyl, morpholino, benzoxazolyl
  • Phenylsilyl group and the like are preferred; an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group that may contain a plurality of heteroatoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, and a substituted amino group. More preferably; an alkyl group, an alkoxy group optionally containing a plurality of heteroatoms, a cyano group, and a substituted amino group are more preferable. These substituents may be further substituted with these substituents. Moreover, when it has two or more substituents, they may be the same or different. If possible, they may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • Ar 4 is an unsubstituted pyridyl group or a phenyl having an alkyl group, an alkoxy group that may contain a plurality of heteroatoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group at the para position relative to L 2 .
  • a group is preferred.
  • the compound represented by the above general formula may have a polymerizable group as a substituent. It is preferable to have a polymerizable group because the hardening property is improved.
  • a polymerizable group examples include an unsaturated polymerizable group, an epoxy group, and an aziridinyl group, preferably an unsaturated polymerizable group, and particularly preferably an ethylenically unsaturated polymerizable group.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated polymerizable group include acryloyl group and methacryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable group is preferably located at the end, ie, preferably present as a substituent for Ar 1 and / or Ar 4 .
  • L 1 is preferably —N ⁇ N—, —C ( ⁇ O) O—, —OC ( ⁇ O) —, or —CH ⁇ N—; —N ⁇ N—, —C ( ⁇ O) O— Or —CH ⁇ N— is more preferred.
  • L 2 is preferably —N ⁇ N—, —C ( ⁇ O) O—, —OC ( ⁇ O) —, —CH ⁇ N—, or —CH ⁇ CH—; —N ⁇ N—, —C ( ⁇ O) O— or —CH ⁇ N— is more preferred.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I) include a compound represented by the following general formula (II).
  • L 11 and L 12 are each, azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group, provided that never L 11 and L 12 is an azo group together;
  • R 11 ⁇ R 15 each Represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 11 and R 13 may form a ring with each other;
  • a 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • R 11 and R 12 are each a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably An alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, n-octyl group, n-decyl group, n-hexadecyl group , A cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and the like.
  • alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, n-octyl group, n-decyl group,
  • R 13 is the same as the preferable substituent of Ar 2 in the general formula (I), and may form a ring with R 11, and a 5-membered ring and a 6-membered ring containing a nitrogen atom are preferable.
  • R 14 and R 15 are respectively the same as the preferred substituents for Ar 2 and Ar 3 in the general formula (I).
  • preferred examples of L 11 and L 12 and preferred examples of the combination thereof are preferred examples of L 1 and L 2 in the general formula (I) and preferred examples of the combination thereof. It is the same.
  • examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I) include compounds represented by the following general formulas (III) and (IV).
  • a compound represented by the following general formula (III) will be used as a yellow dye
  • a compound represented by the following general formula (IV) will be used as a magenta dye.
  • L 21 represents an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group
  • L 22 represents an azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group
  • R 21 to R 25 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R 21 and R 23 may form a ring with each other
  • a 2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • a 2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, and as a substituent when A 2 represents a carbon atom, preferred substitution of Ar 4 in the general formula (I) Same as the group.
  • preferred examples of L 21 and L 22 and preferred examples of the combination thereof are preferred examples of L 1 and L 2 in the general formula (I) and preferred examples of the combination thereof. It is the same.
  • L 21 cannot be an azo group. By making L 21 other than an azo group, the absorption maximum wavelength of the dye can be shortened. Even if L 22 is an azo group, the effect is the same.
  • L 31 is an imino group, or a vinylene group
  • R 31 ⁇ R 35 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 31 and R 33 may form a mutually ring
  • a 3 is a substituted Alternatively, it represents an unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • R 31 to R 35 are the same as R 11 to R 15 in general formula (II), respectively.
  • R 34 is located at a position below and is an alkyl group of C 1 ⁇ 5, the solubility is improved, which is preferable.
  • L 31 represents an imino group (—CH ⁇ N— or —N ⁇ CH—) or a vinylene group (—CH ⁇ CH—), and a vinylene group (—CH ⁇ N—) Is preferred.
  • L 31 is an imino group or vinylene group
  • the dichroic ratio becomes higher. Specifically, for example, the dichroic ratio is higher than that of a compound in which L 31 is an ester group.
  • a 3 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. As the substituent when A 3 represents a carbon atom, preferred substitution of Ar 4 in the general formula (I) Same as the group.
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 21 , R 22 , R 31 and R 32 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
  • substituent of the alkyl group include polymerizable Groups, for example, acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups.
  • a 1 , A 2 and A 3 are carbon atoms substituted with a substituted amino group
  • examples of the amino group substituent include substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the substituent of the alkyl group include a polymerizable group, for example, an acryloyl group and a methacryloyl group.
  • dichroic dye represented by the general formula (I) that can be used in the present invention are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
  • R represents a substituent.
  • R 31 to R 35 are hydrogen atoms or various substituents as raw materials.
  • various compounds represented by the formula (IV) can be produced.
  • a compound in which A 3 is a nitrogen atom can be produced in the same manner.
  • the dichroic dye represented by the general formula (I) used in the present invention exhibits liquid crystallinity.
  • the compound preferably exhibits a nematic liquid crystal phase, preferably a compound exhibiting a nematic liquid crystal phase at a temperature of 10 to 300 ° C., more preferably at a temperature of 100 to 250 ° C.
  • the content of the one or more dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) is not particularly limited. Depending on the application, the preferred range will be determined.
  • one or more dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) are included in the composition. It is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, particularly preferably 30 to 80% by mass, based on the total mass of all the dyes.
  • the content of the one or more dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) in the total solid content excluding the solvent is preferably 20% by mass or more, and preferably 30% by mass or more. Particularly preferred.
  • the concentration of the total solid content is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.5 to 5% by mass.
  • the dichroic dye composition of the present invention may contain one or more additives together with one or more dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I). However, it is preferable that substantially no liquid crystalline compounds (low molecular liquid crystalline compounds and high molecular liquid crystalline compounds) are contained as materials other than coloring materials such as pigments.
  • the dichroic dye composition of the present invention includes a liquid crystal material as a host and a dichroic dye as a guest, and is used as an aspect in which the dichroic dye is aligned with the alignment of the liquid crystal material. However, it is preferable to use the dichroic dye as an embodiment in which the dichroic dye is aligned by its liquid crystallinity.
  • the composition used for formation usually contains 80% by mass or more of a liquid crystal compound as a host in the total solid content, and the content of the guest dye is about 5 to 15% by mass.
  • a preferred embodiment of the present invention is a non-GH embodiment that does not substantially contain a liquid crystalline non-colored material. Specifically, the proportion of the liquid crystalline non-colored material in the composition is 30% by mass or less. The aspect which is is preferable, More preferably, it is 20 mass% or less, More preferably, it is 10 mass% or less, More preferably, it is 5 mass% or less. It is particularly preferable that no liquid crystalline non-colored material is contained.
  • a non-liquid crystalline polyfunctional monomer having a radical polymerizable group The composition of the present invention preferably contains a non-liquid crystalline polyfunctional monomer having a radical polymerizable group.
  • the non-liquid crystalline polyfunctional monomer having a radical polymerizable group refers to a polyfunctional monomer in which a growth active species undergoes a radical polymerization reaction.
  • This polyfunctional monomer is preferably a polyfunctional monomer having two or more double bonds in the molecule, particularly preferably an ethylenic (aliphatic) unsaturated double bond, specifically, Polyfunctional monomers having functional groups such as alkenes, dienes, acrylates, methacrylates, diesters of unsaturated polycarboxylic acids, amides of ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated carboxylic acids, unsaturated nitriles, styrene and derivatives thereof, vinyl esters, vinyl ethers, etc. Can be mentioned.
  • the number of double bonds in the molecule is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 15, and most preferably 2 to 6.
  • the polyfunctional monomer is preferably an ester of a polyol having two or more hydroxyl groups in the molecule and an unsaturated fatty acid.
  • unsaturated fatty acids include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, maleic acid and itaconic acid, with acrylic acid and methacrylic acid being preferred.
  • the polyol having 4 or more hydroxyl groups in the molecule is preferably a tetrahydric or higher alcohol or a trihydric or higher alcohol oligomer.
  • the oligomer has a molecular structure in which polyhydric alcohols are linked by an ether bond, an ester bond or a urethane bond. Oligomers having a molecular structure in which polyhydric alcohols are linked by ether bonds are preferred.
  • the polyfunctional monomer is particularly preferably soluble in an organic solvent. An example of such a monomer is a compound having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher at normal pressure.
  • examples of the bifunctional (meth) acrylate include ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, Polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, tetraethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, bisphenoxyethanol full orange acrylate and the like are listed, and commercially available products thereof include, for example, Aronix M-210, M-240, M-6200 (Toa Synthetic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD HDDA, HX-220, R-604 (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Biscote 260, 312 and 335HP (Osaka Organic Chemical Co., Ltd.), etc. Is mentioned.
  • Examples of the trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylate include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, tri ((meth) acryloyloxyethyl) phosphate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, Examples thereof include dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate and dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, and examples of commercially available products thereof include Aronix M-309, M-400, M-405, M-450, and the like.
  • M-7100, M-8030, M-8060 all trade names, manufactured by Toa Gosei Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • KAYARAD TMPTA, DPHA, DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, DPCA-120 both Product name, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • BISCOAT 295, the 300, the 360, the same GPT, the same 3PA, the 400 (trade name, manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • bifunctional or trifunctional or higher (meth) acrylates include, for example, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane diacrylate.
  • Monomers composed of an ester of polyol and acrylic acid are commercially available from Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. (trade name: Diabeam UK-4154) and Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. (trade name: KYARAD / DPHA, SR355).
  • bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylates may be used alone or in combination, and may be used in combination with monofunctional (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of monofunctional (meth) acrylates include 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, carbitol (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, 3-methoxybutyl (meth) acrylate, and 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl.
  • 2-Hydroxypropyl phthalate polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, ethylene glycol (meth) acrylate, and the like.
  • the polymerization reaction includes a thermal polymerization reaction using a thermal polymerization initiator and a photopolymerization reaction using a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the total content of the pigment and the non-liquid crystalline polymerizable polyfunctional monomer in the total solid content excluding the solvent is preferably 50% by mass or more, particularly preferably 70% by mass or more.
  • the composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization initiator.
  • a polymerization initiator known ones can be suitably used according to photopolymerization and thermal polymerization.
  • ⁇ -carbonyl compounds US Pat. Nos. 2,367,661 and 2,367,670
  • Acyloin ether described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,448,828,
  • ⁇ -hydrocarbon-substituted aromatic acyloin compound described in U.S. Pat. No.
  • the amount of the photopolymerization initiator used is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content excluding the solvent. Examples of the photopolymerization initiator, the amount of the photopolymerization initiator used, and the value of the light irradiation energy for the polymerization are described in paragraphs [0050] to [0051] of JP 2001-91741 A. Applicable.
  • an organic solvent or an arbitrary additive can be blended and used in addition to the above-mentioned pigment, non-liquid crystalline polyfunctional monomer, and polymerization initiator.
  • the additive include an anti-wind unevenness agent, an anti-repellency agent, an additive for controlling the tilt angle of the alignment film (the tilt angle of the liquid crystalline dye at the light absorption anisotropic film / alignment film interface), air Additives for controlling the tilt angle of the interface (the tilt angle of the dye at the polarizer film / air interface), saccharides, agents having at least one of antifungal, antibacterial and antibacterial functions, non-liquid crystalline binder polymers Etc.
  • each additive will be described.
  • Wind unevenness prevention agent When the composition of the present invention is prepared as a coating solution to form a film coated on the surface, a material for preventing wind unevenness during coating, an anti-wind uneven agent, is added to the composition. May be.
  • a fluorine-based polymer is used as the wind unevenness preventing agent.
  • a fluorine-based polymer There is no restriction
  • the amount of the fluorine-based polymer used for the purpose of preventing wind unevenness is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 10% by mass with respect to the liquid crystalline dye. More preferably, it is in the range of 5 to 10% by mass, and still more preferably in the range of 0.5 to 5% by mass.
  • Anti-repellent agent When the composition of the present invention is prepared as a coating solution to form a film coated on the surface, a material for preventing repelling during coating, a repelling agent, may be added to the composition. .
  • a polymer is used as the repellency inhibitor.
  • the polymer to be used is not particularly limited as long as it is compatible with the liquid crystalline dye and does not significantly inhibit the change in the tilt angle or orientation of the dye. Examples of polymers that can be used as repellency inhibitors are described in JP-A-8-95030, and specific examples of particularly preferred polymers include cellulose esters. Examples of cellulose esters include cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate propionate, hydroxypropyl cellulose, and cellulose acetate butyrate.
  • the amount of the polymer used for the purpose of preventing repellency is generally preferably in the range of 0.1 to 10% by weight, preferably 0.1 to 8% by weight with respect to the liquid crystalline dye. % Is more preferable, and a range of 0.1 to 5% by mass is even more preferable.
  • Alignment film tilt angle control agent It is preferable to add an additive for controlling the tilt angle of the alignment film and an alignment film tilt angle control agent to the composition of the present invention.
  • the alignment film tilt angle control agent include compounds having both a polar group and a nonpolar group in the molecule.
  • compounds having both polar and nonpolar groups in the molecule include R 0 —OH, R 0 —COOH, R 0 —O—R 0 , R 0 —NH 2 , R 0 —NH—R 0.
  • R 0 is a non-polar group, if R 0 is plural, each R 0 is may be the same or different.
  • organic salt in addition to the organic salt of the above compound (for example, ammonium salt, carboxylate, sulfonate, etc.), pyridinium salt and the like can be preferably employed.
  • R 0 —OH, R 0 —COOH, R 0 —O—R 0 , R 0 —NH 2 , R 0 —SO 3 H, HO —PO (—OR 0 ) 2 , (HO—) 2 PO—OR 0 , PO (—OR 0 ) 3 or an organic salt thereof is preferred.
  • nonpolar group R 2 O examples include an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched, or cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms) and an alkenyl group (preferably a linear chain having 1 to 30 carbon atoms). Branched, cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl groups), alkynyl groups (preferably linear, branched, cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), aryl groups (preferably having 6 carbon atoms).
  • alkyl group preferably a linear, branched, or cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkenyl group preferably a linear chain having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkynyl groups preferably linear, branched, cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • Examples thereof include ⁇ 30 substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups) and silyl groups (preferably substituted or unsubstituted silyl groups having 3 to 30 carbon atoms). These nonpolar groups may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group (including a cycloalkyl group and a bicycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group (a cycloalkenyl group and a bicycloalkenyl group).
  • the tilt angle of the dye molecules at the alignment film side interface can be reduced. Can be adjusted.
  • the addition amount of the alignment film tilt angle control agent is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 30% by mass, and preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the mass of the dichroic dye. More preferably, it is 0.005 to 10% by mass.
  • the alignment film tilt control agent described in JP-A-2006-58801 can be used.
  • Air interface tilt angle control agent It is preferable to add an additive for controlling the tilt angle at the air interface and an air interface tilt angle control agent to the composition of the present invention.
  • An example of the air interface tilt angle control agent is a horizontal alignment agent.
  • the horizontal alignment agent (1) a fluoroaliphatic group-containing compound represented by the following general formula (10); or (2) selected from the group consisting of polymerized units of fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomers represented by general formula (11) or general formula (12) and polymerized units of amide group-containing monomers represented by general formula (13) A polymer comprising at least one polymerized unit; It is.
  • the fluoroaliphatic group-containing compound represented by the following general formula (10) will be described.
  • R 51 , R 52 and R 53 each independently represents an alkoxy group having a CF 3 group or a CF 2 H group at the terminal
  • X 11 , X 22 and X 33 each independently represent —NH—
  • m11, m22 and m33 each independently represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • Each of the substituents represented by R 51 , R 52 and R 53 is an alkoxy group having a CF 3 group or a CF 2 H group at the terminal, and may be linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms is preferably 4 to 20, more preferably 4 to 16, and particularly preferably 6 to 16.
  • the alkoxy group having a CF 3 group or a CF 2 H group at the terminal is an alkoxy group in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms contained in the alkoxy group are substituted with fluorine atoms. 50% or more of the hydrogen atoms in the alkoxy group are preferably substituted with fluorine atoms, more preferably 60% or more are substituted, and particularly preferably 70% or more are substituted. Examples of alkoxy groups having a CF 3 group or a CF 2 H group at the ends represented by R 51 , R 52 and R 53 are shown below.
  • X 11 , X 22 and X 33 each preferably represent —NH— or —O—, and most preferably represents —NH—.
  • m 11 , m 22 and m 33 are each preferably 2.
  • R 61 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group
  • L 61 represents a divalent linking group
  • m1 represents an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less.
  • R 62 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group
  • L 62 represents a divalent linking group
  • n1 represents an integer of 1 to 18.
  • R 73 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 71 and R 72 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms or a carbon number. 1 to 20 heterocyclic groups are represented. R 71 and R 72 may be connected to each other to form a heterocyclic ring.
  • R 61 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L 61 represents a divalent linking group, m1 represents an integer of 1 to 18, more preferably 2 to 12, still more preferably 4 to 8, and most preferably 4 or 6.
  • R 62 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L 62 represents a divalent linking group, n1 represents an integer of 1 to 18, more preferably 2 to 12, still more preferably 4 to 8, and most preferably 4 or 6.
  • L 61 and L 62 are not limited as long as they are each independently a divalent substituent, but a structure represented by the following general formula (14) is more preferable.
  • (a) shows the position bonded to the double bond side
  • (b) shows the position bonded to the fluoroaliphatic group side.
  • Formula (14) (a) -X 10 -R 20 - (b)
  • X 10 is a single bond or * -COO-**, * -COS-**, * -O.
  • R 20 represents an optionally substituted polymethylene group (eg, methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group), an optionally substituted phenylene group (eg, o-phenylene group, m-phenylene group). , P-phenylene group, and the like, and a group that can be formed by any combination thereof.
  • a polymethylene group is more preferable, and among the polymethylene groups, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a trimethylene group, and a tetramethylene group are preferable, and a methylene group and an ethylene group are still more preferable.
  • R 21 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or an aryl group which may have a substituent having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • a 1-6 alkyl group is more preferable, and a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is still more preferable.
  • the fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomer represented by the general formula (11) is more preferably a monomer represented by the following general formula (11 ').
  • X 1 represents a divalent group represented by —O—, —S— or —N (R 222 ) —, and p represents an integer of 1 to 8.
  • X 1 is more preferably —O— or —N (R 222 ) —, and most preferably —O—.
  • p is more preferably from 1 to 6, and still more preferably from 1 to 3.
  • R 61 and m1 have the same meanings as described in the general formula (11), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R 222 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or an aryl group which may have a substituent having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • X 2 represents a substituent represented by —O—, —S— or —N (R 222 ) —, and q represents an integer of 1 to 8.
  • X 2 is more preferably —O— or —N (R 222 ) —, and most preferably —O—.
  • p is more preferably from 1 to 6, and still more preferably from 1 to 3.
  • R 62 and n1 have the same meanings as described in the general formula (12), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R 222 has the same meaning as that described in formula (11 ′).
  • R 73 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 71 and R 72 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and these substituents are further substituted It may have a group.
  • R 71 and R 72 may be linked to each other to form a heterocyclic ring.
  • the formed heterocyclic ring include a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, and a morpholine ring.
  • the polymer used as the horizontal alignment agent may contain either a fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomer or an amide group-containing monomer as a polymerized unit, but preferably a fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomer and an amide group-containing monomer. Both are included as polymerized units.
  • the polymer may contain two or more kinds of each monomer as polymerized units, or may be a copolymer containing one or more other copolymerizable monomers as polymerized units. Other types of such copolymerizable monomers include Polymer Handbook 2nd ed. , J .; Brandrup, Wiley Interscience (1975) Chapter 2, Pages 1-483 can be used. Examples thereof include compounds having one addition polymerizable unsaturated bond selected from acrylic esters, methacrylic esters, methacrylamides, allyl compounds, vinyl ethers, vinyl esters and the like.
  • the preferred mass average molecular weight of the polymer used as the horizontal alignment agent is 2000 to 100,000, more preferably 3000 to 80,000, and still more preferably 4,000 to 60,000.
  • the mass average molecular weight and the molecular weight are converted to polystyrene by GTH analyzer using a column of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, TSKgel G2000HxL (both are trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and detected by a solvent THF and a differential refractometer. Is the molecular weight.
  • the present invention is not limited to the following specific examples.
  • the number in a formula shows the mass ratio of each monomer component.
  • Mw represents a mass average molecular weight.
  • horizontal alignment agents described in JP-A-2005-99248, JP-A-2005-134484, JP-A-2006-126768, and JP-A-2006-267183 may be selected.
  • only one horizontal alignment agent may be used, or two or more horizontal alignment agents may be used.
  • the addition amount of the horizontal alignment agent is preferably from 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably from 0.5% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the addition amount of the dichroic dye. A mass% to 5 mass% is particularly preferred.
  • tilt angle means an angle formed between the major axis direction of the dye molecule and the interface (alignment film interface or air interface).
  • the preferred tilt angle on the alignment film side is 0 ° to 10 °, more preferably 0 ° to 5 °, particularly preferably 0 ° to 2 °, and most preferably 0 ° to 1 °. is there.
  • the tilt angle on the air interface side is preferably 0 ° to 10 °, more preferably 0 to 5 °, and particularly preferably 0 to 2 °.
  • the composition of the present invention is (1) a fluoroaliphatic group-containing compound represented by general formula (10); and (2) a polymerized unit and a general formula of a fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomer represented by general formula (11) or general formula (12) A polymer comprising at least one polymerized unit of an amide group-containing monomer represented by (13); By including at least one of the above, the tilt angle on the alignment film side in the polarizer using this may be suppressed to 2 ° or less, for example.
  • Saccharides may be added to the composition of the present invention. By adding saccharides, the degree of association of the dye aggregate can be improved, and as a result, the molecular orientation of the dye can be enhanced.
  • saccharides that can be used include monosaccharides, disaccharides, polysaccharides, and sugar derivatives such as sugar alcohols.
  • saccharides those having a hydroxyl group of 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and preferably 18 or less, more preferably 12 or less, are preferred from the viewpoint of contributing to molecular association.
  • the number of hydroxyl groups is within the above range, the interaction with the dye is moderate, there is no precipitation caused by the interaction being too strong, and the orientation can be improved by the moderate interaction, which is preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the saccharide used is preferably 1,000 or less, more preferably 700 or less. When the molecular weight of the saccharide is within the above range, phase separation from the dye does not occur, and it can contribute to improvement of the orientation of the dye, which is preferable. Moreover, as carbon number of saccharides to be used, it is 36 or less normally, Preferably it is 24 or less. When the carbon number of the saccharide is within the above range, phase separation from the dye does not occur, and it can contribute to improvement of the orientation of the dye, which is preferable.
  • Examples of monosaccharides include xylose, ribose, glucose, fructose, mannose, sorbose, and galactose.
  • Examples of the oligosaccharide include trehalose, kojibiose, nigerose, maltose, maltotriose, isomaltotriose, maltotetraose, isomaltose, sophorose, laminaribiose, cellobiose, gentiobiose, lactose, sucrose, melibiose, lutinose, primiverose, Examples include turanose, panose, isopanose, cellotriose, manninotriose, soratriose, melezitose, planteose, gentianose, umbelliferose, raffinose, and stachyose.
  • sugar alcohol examples include compounds obtained by reducing the above monosaccharides and oligosaccharides such as threitol, xylitol, ribitol, arabitol, sorbitol, and mannitol.
  • saccharide xylose, mannose, maltose, maltotriose and arabitol are particularly preferable.
  • saccharides and sugar alcohols each have optical isomers, but each of them may be used alone or both may be included in the composition used in the present invention. Moreover, saccharides may be used individually by 1 type in the composition of this invention, and 2 or more types may be used in combination.
  • the saccharide content relative to the pigment is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 1 in terms of mass ratio. More preferably, it is 0.2 or more, particularly preferably 0.3 or more, further preferably 0.7 or less, and particularly preferably 0.6 or less.
  • the saccharide content is in the above range, an effect of improving the association degree of the dye aggregate can be obtained.
  • Antifungal, antibacterial and fungicides You may add the chemical
  • the agent having at least one of antifungal, antibacterial, and sterilizing functions as referred to in the present invention is an antifungal ability that suppresses the generation / growth / growth of mold, the bactericidal ability that kills microorganisms, the generation / growth of microorganisms, Any agent may be used as long as it has at least one function of antibacterial ability to suppress proliferation, and known antifungal agents, bactericides and antibacterial agents can be used. However, it is preferable that the optical properties of the anisotropic film prepared using the composition of the present invention are not deteriorated.
  • agent having at least one of antifungal, antibacterial and bactericidal functions used in the present invention include, for example, conventional phenolic compounds such as 2,4,4′-trichloro-2′-hydroxydiphenyl, chlorine dioxide and the like.
  • agent having at least one of antifungal, antibacterial and bactericidal functions used in the present invention include, for example, conventional phenolic compounds such as 2,4,4′-trichloro-2′-hydroxydiphenyl, chlorine dioxide and the like.
  • iodine such as chlorine and iodine
  • quaternary ammonium salt such as benzalkonium chloride.
  • 1,2-benzisothiazole-3-one Proxel BDN, Proxel BD20, Proxel GXL, Proxel LV, Proxel XL, Proxel XL2, Proxel Ultra10 (trade name, manufactured by Avecia) Polyhexylene biguanide hydrochloride as an active ingredient, Proxel IB (Avecia, product name), Dithio-2,2'-bis (benzmethylamide) as an active ingredient, Densil P (Aveci product, Aveci product) ) And the like. Further, the following compounds are particularly preferable because they exhibit an antibacterial effect particularly in a very small amount. No.
  • medical agent which has at least any one function of antifungal, antibacterial, and disinfection which can be used by this invention can also be used individually or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • the content of the agent having at least one of antifungal, antibacterial and sterilizing functions in the composition is not particularly limited, but is usually 0.01% by mass or more, preferably 0.001% by mass or more. On the other hand, it is usually 0.5% by mass or less, preferably 0.3% by mass or less.
  • the agent does not precipitate, phase separation occurs when the dye film is formed, and the addition effect of these agents does not cause optical defects such as point defects and light scattering. Is obtained.
  • an electron-deficient discotic compound and an electron-rich compound are contained in the composition in order to obtain a polarizing film having a high degree of polarization. It is preferable to contain an (Electron-Rich) compound.
  • an (Electron-Rich) compound in the present invention, for example, those described in JP-A-2006-323377 can be used as the electron-deficient discotic compound and the electron-rich compound.
  • the ratio of the electron-deficient discotic compound is usually 0.1 parts by mass or more, preferably 0.2 parts by mass or more, and usually 50 parts by mass, when the total composition is 100 parts by mass.
  • the range is not more than part by mass, preferably not more than 40 parts by mass. When the content is within the above range, the effect of adding the compound can be obtained without excessively increasing the viscosity when the composition is prepared as a solution.
  • the ratio of the electron-rich compound is usually 50 parts by mass or less, preferably 40 parts by mass or less when the entire composition is 100 parts by mass.
  • the addition effect of this compound can be acquired, without raising a viscosity too much that it is the said range.
  • the mass fraction of the electron-deficient discotic compound and the electron-rich compound is usually preferably in the range of 10/90 to 90/10. Outside this range, it is not preferable because the effect of using an electron-deficient discotic compound or an electron-rich compound may not be obtained.
  • Non-liquid crystalline binder polymer may contain a non-liquid crystalline polymer as a binder.
  • non-liquid crystalline polymers include acrylic resins such as polyacrylonitrile, polyacrylic acid esters and polyacrylamide, polyvinyl acetal resins such as polystyrene resin, polyvinyl acetoacetal and polyvinyl butyral, ethyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, ethyl hydroxy cellulose, hydroxy Modified cellulose resins such as propyl cellulose, ethyl hydroxyethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose nitrate, etc., cellulose resins such as ethyl hydroxyethyl cellulose and ethyl cellulose, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, Polyester resin, polycarbonate resin, phenoxy resin, phenol resin
  • non-liquid crystalline binder polymer an acrylic polymer (a resin having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain) is particularly preferable, and it is particularly preferable that the non-liquid crystalline binder polymer is soluble in an organic solvent.
  • a known radical polymerization method can be applied.
  • Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. in the production by the radical polymerization method can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and the conditions should be determined experimentally. You can also.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acid eg, (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, itaconic acid, maleic acid and fumaric acid
  • aromatic vinyl compound eg, styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, 2-vinylpyridine, 4-vinylpyridine, N-vinylimidazole, etc.
  • acrylic acid alkyl esters eg, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl) (Meth) acrylate, i-butyl (meth) acrylate, hexyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dodecyl (meth) acrylate, etc.
  • acrylic acid alkyl aryl ester eg, benzyl (meth) acrylate, etc.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acids aromatic vinyl compounds, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl aryl esters and carboxylic acid vinyl esters are preferred.
  • (meth) acrylic acid is a generic term for acrylic acid and methacrylic acid together
  • (meth) acrylate is a generic term for acrylate and methacrylate.
  • an acrylic polymer having a (meth) acryloyl group in the side chain or a macromonomer for example, a polystyrene macromonomer, a polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer, a polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, a polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, a polyethylene as a copolymerization component
  • An acrylic graft polymer containing glycol polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate and the like is also preferable. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the color tone of the dichroic dye composition of the present invention there is no particular limitation on the color tone of the dichroic dye composition of the present invention, and it can be prepared as a coloring composition of various color tones depending on the application. For example, in an embodiment used for the production of a polarizing film, it is preferable to mix two or more dyes so as to obtain a black colored composition.
  • One aspect of the dichroic dye composition of the present invention is a black coloring composition containing a yellow dye, a magenta dye, and a cyan dye, respectively.
  • the dichroic dye represented by the general formula (I) may be used as a dye having any color tone.
  • composition of this embodiment may be prepared by using two or more kinds of dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) and having different color tones.
  • a yellow dye means a dye having an absorption maximum wavelength in the range of 400 to 500 nm
  • a magenta dye means a dye having an absorption maximum wavelength in the range of 500 to 580 nm.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength can be known by preparing a solution in which a dye is dissolved in an organic solvent and measuring the absorption spectrum of the solution. For example, NMP (N-methylpyrrolidone) is used as the organic solvent.
  • An example of this embodiment is a black colored composition containing at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (III) as a yellow dye.
  • Another example is a black colored composition containing at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (III) as a yellow dye and a cyan dye.
  • the yellow dye represented by the general formula (III) can achieve black color by mixing with a cyan dye. Of course, it may further contain a magenta dye.
  • Another example is a black coloring composition containing at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (IV) as a magenta dye.
  • at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (III) is used as a yellow dye, and at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (IV) is used.
  • a black colored composition containing seeds as magenta dyes is also a dichroic azo dye which has liquid crystallinity.
  • dichroic azo dye having liquid crystallinity for example, compounds represented by the following general formulas (1) and (2) are preferable.
  • R 1 to R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R 6 and R 7 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • Q 1 represents an optionally substituted aromatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic heterocyclic group or cyclohexane ring group.
  • L 1 represents a divalent linking group.
  • A represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • R 8 and R 9 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • Q 2 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent.
  • Q 3 represents an optionally substituted divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group or divalent aromatic heterocyclic group, n represents an integer of 1 to 4, and when n is 2 or more, A plurality of Q 3 may be the same or different.
  • R 10 to R 13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 15 and R 16 each independently have a substituent.
  • B 1 represents a nitrogen atom or an optionally substituted carbon atom
  • R 17 to R 20 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent
  • B 2 represents a nitrogen atom Or represents an optionally substituted carbon atom
  • m represents 1 or 2, and when m is 2 or more, two R 17 to R 20 may be the same or different.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (I) may be used as the cyan dye.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (I) may be used as the cyan dye.
  • the transmitted light when the C light source is used as the light source is 0.28 ⁇ x ⁇ 0.36, 0.28 ⁇ y ⁇ 0.36 in the xy chromaticity diagram.
  • this condition for example, when the polarizing film is disposed between the liquid crystal layer and the color filter layer in the liquid crystal cell, it is preferable because scattering over the entire visible region caused by the RGB color filter can be suppressed.
  • the C light source, the xy chromaticity diagram, and how to obtain x and y are described in detail in the JIS Handbook [61] color issued by the Japanese Standards Association and can be referred to.
  • the dichroic dye composition of the present invention can be used for various applications. Since it shows a high dichroic ratio, it is preferably used as a material for forming a polarizing film. Hereinafter, the polarizing film formed from the composition of the present invention will be described. 2. -1 Polarizing Film The present invention also relates to a polarizing film formed from the dichroic dye composition of the present invention.
  • the polarizing film of the present invention transmits arbitrary linearly polarized light and absorbs, reflects, or backscatters polarized light whose plane of polarization is orthogonal to the linearly polarized light; and transmits right or left circularly polarized light and spirals the circularly polarized light. May absorb, reflect, or backscatter circularly polarized light in the reverse direction.
  • the dichroic dye contained in the composition of the present invention exhibits liquid crystallinity, for example, when the composition of the present invention is prepared as a coating liquid and applied to the alignment film surface, the dye molecules are aligned at the interface with the alignment film.
  • the film is oriented at the tilt angle of the film, and is oriented at the tilt angle of the air interface at the interface with air.
  • the dye molecules can be used as a linearly polarizing film by horizontally aligning them and fixing them in the aligned state.
  • the thickness of the polarizing film of the present invention formed from the above composition is not particularly limited, but is generally preferably 0.01 to 2 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.05 to 2 ⁇ m. . Since the composition of the present invention exhibits a high dichroic ratio, the polarizing film of the present invention comprising the composition has a film thickness in the above range, and can achieve a degree of polarization of 85% or more even if it is relatively thin. . Accordingly, it is particularly useful as a polarizing layer disposed in a liquid crystal cell, for example, in applications where thinning is particularly required. That is, it is particularly useful as a polarizing layer that contributes to reducing the generation of scattered light by depolarizing linearly polarized light entering the cell by a member in the cell such as a color filter layer.
  • the polarizing film of the present invention may have functional layers such as a transparent resin cured layer, an adhesive layer, and an antireflection layer on the surface thereof.
  • the production method of the polarizing film of the present invention is not particularly limited. An example is as follows. [1] Step of rubbing or light-irradiating the alignment film formed on the substrate directly or on the substrate [2] Applying the composition of the present invention prepared as a coating solution on the substrate or the alignment film The step of forming a film [3] It is preferable to produce the film by a method including the step of orienting the dye molecules in the composition by evaporating the solvent from the film to form a polarizing film.
  • Alignment treatment step First, an alignment treatment is performed on the surface of the substrate or the surface of the alignment film formed on the substrate.
  • the alignment process includes a rubbing process and a light irradiation process to be described later.
  • ⁇ Rubbing treatment As described in detail later, the rubbing treatment is performed by rubbing the surface of the substrate or the like in a certain direction with a buff such as cotton cloth or absorbent cotton to form a fine groove parallel to the direction. It is an operation.
  • the composition of the present invention to the rubbing surface, the dye molecules can be finally adsorbed to the surface in an oriented state.
  • a desired orientation state can be obtained by adjusting the rubbing conditions, for example, the rubbing density.
  • the rubbing density For example, between the rubbing density and the pretilt angle of the alignment film, there is a relationship in which the pretilt angle decreases as the rubbing density increases, and the pretilt angle increases as the rubbing density decreases.
  • a method for changing the rabin density a method described in “Liquid Crystal Handbook” (published by Maruzen) can be used.
  • the rubbing density (L) is quantified by the following formula (A).
  • N Nl (1 + 2 ⁇ rn / 60v)
  • N is the number of rubbing
  • l is the contact length of the rubbing roller
  • r is the radius of the roller
  • n is the number of rotations (rpm) of the roller
  • v is the stage moving speed (second speed).
  • the rubbing frequency should be increased, the contact length of the rubbing roller should be increased, the radius of the roller should be increased, the rotation speed of the roller should be increased, and the stage moving speed should be decreased, while the rubbing density should be decreased. To do this, you can do the reverse.
  • the linearly polarized light irradiation is an operation for causing a photoreaction in the photo-alignment material.
  • the wavelength of the light to be irradiated varies depending on the photo-alignment material used, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a wavelength necessary for the photoreaction.
  • the peak wavelength of light used for light irradiation is 200 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably ultraviolet light having a peak wavelength of light of 400 nm or less.
  • the light source used for light irradiation is a commonly used light source such as a tungsten lamp, a halogen lamp, a xenon lamp, a xenon flash lamp, a mercury lamp, a mercury xenon lamp, a carbon arc lamp, or various lasers (eg, semiconductor laser, helium). Neon laser, argon ion laser, helium cadmium laser, YAG laser), light emitting diode, cathode ray tube, and the like.
  • a method using a polarizing plate eg, iodine polarizing plate, dichroic dye polarizing plate, wire grid polarizing plate
  • reflection using a prism-based element eg, Glan-Thompson prism
  • Brewster angle A method using a polarizing film or a method using light emitted from a polarized laser light source can be employed.
  • a method of irradiating light from the top surface or the back surface with respect to the film surface and from a direction perpendicular or oblique to the film surface is employed.
  • the incident angle of the light varies depending on the photo-alignment material, but is, for example, 0 to 90 ° (vertical), preferably 40 to 90.
  • a method of irradiating light from an oblique direction is adopted, and the incident angle is 10 to 80 °, preferably 20 to 60, and particularly preferably 30 to 50 °.
  • the irradiation time is preferably 1 minute to 60 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes.
  • a method of performing light irradiation using a photomask as many times as necessary for pattern creation or a method of writing a pattern by laser beam scanning can be employed.
  • Coating step This is a step of coating the composition of the present invention prepared as a coating solution on the surface of the substrate or alignment film subjected to the alignment treatment.
  • a solvent used for the preparation of the coating solution an organic solvent is preferable.
  • organic solvents include amides (eg, N, N-dimethylformamide), sulfoxides (eg, dimethyl sulfoxide), heterocyclic compounds (eg, pyridine), hydrocarbons (eg, benzene, toluene, hexane), alkyl halides (Eg, chloroform, dichloromethane), esters (eg, methyl acetate, butyl acetate), ketones (eg, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone), ethers (eg, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane). Hydrocarbons, alkyl halides and ketones are preferred. Two or more organic solvents may be used in combination.
  • wet deposition methods include Yuji Harasaki, “Coating Engineering”, Asakura Shoten Co., Ltd., published on March 20, 1971, pages 253-277 and “Creation and Application of Molecular Cooperative Materials” supervised by Kunihiro Ichimura, CMC Co., Ltd. Publicly known methods described in Publication, published on March 3, 1998, pages 118 to 149, and the like.
  • a normal coating method for example, spin coating method, spray coating method, slit coating method, slit and spin method, wire bar coating method, roll coating method, blade coating method, free span coating method, extrusion coating method, (Direct gravure coating method, reverse gravure coating method, die coating method, ink jet method).
  • a slit coating method from the viewpoint of uniformity of alignment and use efficiency of the composition.
  • the slit coating method will be described as an example.
  • Slit coating method An example of the slit coating method is as follows. A coating liquid of the composition of the present invention is applied to a substrate (for example, a substrate having a length of 800 mm or more on one side) from a slit die of a cast coating machine having a relative moving speed of 50 to 150 mm / sec with the substrate. coating to form a wet coating film having a thickness L 1 on the substrate surface. Then, if necessary, the solvent is removed to form a pre-baked coating film having a thickness of L 2 and prebaked against wet film. At this time, the film thickness L 1 of the wet coating film is preferably 0.1 to 20 ⁇ m, and the film thickness L 2 of the dry coating film is preferably 0.01 to 2 ⁇ m.
  • the gap between the discharge port of the slit die and the substrate surface is in the range of 50 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the temperature at the time of application is preferably 0 ° C. or more and 80 ° C. or less, and the humidity is preferably about 10% RH or more and 80% RH or less.
  • the substrate when the coating liquid of the composition of the present invention is applied by a wet film forming method, the substrate may be heated or cooled.
  • the temperature of the substrate at this time is preferably 10 ° C. or higher and 60 ° C. or lower. If the upper limit is exceeded, the orientation may be disturbed before drying under reduced pressure, which will be described in detail below, and if it is lower than the lower limit, water droplets may form on the surface of the support, which may hinder coating.
  • the substrate may be heated when the polarizing film applied by the wet film forming method is dried under reduced pressure.
  • the temperature of the substrate at this time is preferably 60 ° C. or lower. If the upper limit is exceeded, the orientation may be disturbed before drying under reduced pressure.
  • a polarizing film may be formed by applying a dye composition on a substrate or alignment film subjected to alignment treatment in one direction at an angle not parallel to the alignment treatment direction on the substrate or alignment film. it can. Furthermore, it is more preferable to apply the dye composition in a direction substantially coinciding with the vertical or horizontal direction of the substrate. Thereby, a polarizing film having no alignment defect and a high degree of polarization can be formed. In addition, after applying the dye composition, it is not necessary to cut out the substrate in order to give the necessary polarization angle, and the productivity is high.
  • a step of orienting the dye molecules is carried out by evaporating the solvent from the coating film formed by the [2] coating step.
  • the drying temperature is preferably natural drying at room temperature, and it is preferable not to disturb the alignment state of the dye molecules formed by coating (avoid thermal relaxation or the like).
  • the pressure reduction treatment it is also preferable to evaporate the solvent and dry at a lower temperature.
  • the decompression treatment here refers to removing a solvent by evaporating a substrate having a coating film (polarizing film) under reduced pressure conditions. At this time, it is preferable that the substrate having the polarizing film be kept horizontal so that it does not flow from the high part to the bottom part. The shorter the time from the start of application to the pressure reduction treatment of the polarizing film, the better. The time is preferably from 1 second to 30 seconds.
  • the decompression method for example, the following methods can be mentioned.
  • the polarizing film obtained by applying the coating liquid is put into a reduced pressure processing apparatus together with the substrate and subjected to a reduced pressure process.
  • a decompression processing apparatus as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of JP-A-2006-201759 can be used. Details of the decompression processing apparatus are described in JP-A No. 2004-169975.
  • the pressure in the system where the polarizing film is present is preferably 2 ⁇ 10 4 Pa or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 4 Pa or less, and particularly preferably 1 ⁇ 10 3 Pa or less. Further, it is preferably 1 Pa or more, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 1 Pa or more.
  • the pressure finally reached in the system is preferably as described above. If the upper limit is exceeded, drying may not be possible and the orientation may be disturbed. If the lower limit is not reached, drying may be too rapid and defects may occur.
  • the decompression time is preferably 5 seconds or more and 180 seconds or less. If the upper limit is exceeded, the polarizing film cannot be dried rapidly before orientation relaxation, and the orientation may be disturbed.
  • the temperature in the system during the decompression treatment is preferably 10 ° C. or more and 60 ° C. or less. If the upper limit is exceeded, convection may occur during drying and non-uniformity may occur in the polarizing film, and if the lower limit is not reached, drying may not be possible and orientation may be disturbed.
  • the substrate when the dye molecules are aligned after drying the film and removing the solvent, the substrate may be heated in order to promote the alignment.
  • the temperature of the substrate at this time is preferably 50 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 70 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C. or lower.
  • an additive such as a plasticizer may be used in combination with the dye composition.
  • a polarizing film can be obtained by carrying out drying and orientation steps, but it is preferable to further carry out the curing step because the film strength is improved.
  • the dye is oriented, and then polymerized and cured by light irradiation (preferably ultraviolet irradiation) or heating, or a combination thereof. Is preferred.
  • the polarizing film of the present invention can be formed by carrying out the above [1] to [3] and optionally [4]. Further, a transparent resin cured layer, an adhesive layer, an antireflection layer, or the like may be formed on the surface of the polarizing film.
  • the transparent resin cured layer can be formed by applying a coating liquid of the curable transparent resin composition on the surface of the polarizing film and curing it.
  • a coating solvent used for preparing the coating solution a liquid having a boiling point of 60 to 170 ° C. is preferably used.
  • water eg, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, butanol, benzyl alcohol
  • ketone eg, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone
  • ester eg, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate
  • aliphatic hydrocarbons eg, hexane, cyclohexane
  • halogenated hydrocarbons eg, methylene chloride, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride
  • aromatic hydrocarbons Eg, benzene, toluene, xylene
  • amide eg, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, n-methylpyrrolidone
  • ether eg, diethyl
  • toluene, xylene, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, ethanol and butanol are preferred, and particularly preferred dispersion media are methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone and ethanol.
  • the amount of the solvent used is preferably such that the solid content concentration of the curable transparent resin composition is 2 to 50% by mass, and more preferably 3 to 40% by mass.
  • the application method of the polarizing film can be used for the application of the coating liquid of the curable transparent resin composition.
  • the coating film is cured to form a transparent resin cured layer.
  • Curing is preferably performed by ultraviolet irradiation.
  • the orientation film that can be used for the production of the polarizing film of the present invention may be any layer as long as it can impart a desired orientation to the dye molecules provided on the orientation film.
  • rubbing treatment of an organic compound preferably a polymer
  • oblique deposition of an inorganic compound formation of a layer having a microgroove, or an organic compound (eg, ⁇ -tricosanoic acid, disilane)
  • an organic compound eg, ⁇ -tricosanoic acid, disilane
  • LB film Langmuir-Blodgett method
  • octadecylmethylammonium chloride, methyl stearylate an alignment film in which an alignment function is generated by application of an electric field, application of a magnetic field, or light irradiation is also known.
  • an alignment film formed by rubbing the surface of the polymer film is preferable, and from the viewpoint of alignment uniformity, a photo-alignment material A photo-alignment film formed by irradiating the film with light is preferable.
  • the alignment film formed by the rubbing treatment there are many literatures, and many commercially available products can be obtained.
  • polyvinyl alcohol or polyimide and derivatives thereof are preferably used.
  • the thickness of the alignment film is preferably 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.01 to 1 ⁇ m.
  • JP-A-2006-285197 JP-A-2007-76839, JP-A-2007-138138, JP-A-2007-94071, JP-A-2007-121721, JP-A-2007-140465.
  • Aromatic ester compounds described maleimide and / or alkenyl-substituted nadiimide compounds having a photoalignment unit described in JP-A Nos. 2002-265541 and 2002-31703; Patents 4205195 and 4205198
  • Particularly preferred are azo compounds, photocrosslinkable polyimides, polyamides, or esters.
  • the polarizing film of the present invention may have a transparent resin cured layer on the surface thereof. This layer is provided in order to impart physical strength, durability, or optical properties to the polarizing film.
  • the thickness of the transparent resin cured layer is preferably in the range of 1 to 30 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 1 to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the transparent resin cured layer is preferably formed by a crosslinking reaction or a polymerization reaction of an ionizing radiation curable compound.
  • the transparent resin cured layer in the present invention is obtained by applying a coating composition containing an ionizing radiation curable polyfunctional monomer or polyfunctional oligomer on the surface of the polarizer, and crosslinking reaction or polymerization reaction of the polyfunctional monomer or polyfunctional oligomer. Can be formed.
  • the functional group of the ionizing radiation-curable polyfunctional monomer or polyfunctional oligomer is preferably a light, electron beam, or radiation polymerizable group, and among them, a photopolymerizable functional group is preferable.
  • photopolymerizable functional group examples include unsaturated polymerizable functional groups such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, a styryl group, and an allyl group. Among them, a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable. Moreover, inorganic fine particles can also be contained.
  • (Meth) acrylic acid diesters of alkylene glycol such as neopentyl glycol acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol (meth) acrylate, propylene glycol di (meth) acrylate
  • (Meth) acrylic acid diesters of polyoxyalkylene glycols such as triethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, dipropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate
  • (Meth) acrylic acid diesters of polyhydric alcohols such as pentaerythritol di (meth) acrylate
  • (Meth) acrylic acid diesters of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide adducts such as 2,2-bis ⁇ 4- (acryloxy-diethoxy) phenyl ⁇ propane and 2-2bis
  • esters of polyhydric alcohol and (meth) acrylic acid are preferred. More preferably, a polyfunctional monomer having 3 or more (meth) acryloyl groups in one molecule is preferable.
  • a photoinitiator As a polymerization initiator used for formation of the said transparent resin cured layer, a photoinitiator is preferable.
  • a photopolymerization initiator As the photopolymerization initiator, a photoradical polymerization initiator and a photocationic polymerization initiator are preferable, and a photoradical polymerization initiator is particularly preferable.
  • the photo radical polymerization initiator include acetophenones, benzophenones, Michler's benzoylbenzoate, ⁇ -amyloxime ester, tetramethylthiuram monosulfide, and thioxanthones.
  • photo radical polymerization initiators include Kayacure (DETX-S, BP-100, BDDK, CTX, BMS, 2-EAQ, ABQ, CPTX, EPD, ITX, QTX, BTC, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. MCA, etc., all trade names), Irgacure (651, 184, 127, 500, 907, 369, 1173, 2959, 4265, 4263 etc., all trade names) manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd., Sartomer Examples include Esacure (KIP100F, KB1, EB3, BP, X33, KT046, KT37, KIP150, TZT, all of which are trade names).
  • photocleavable photoradical polymerization initiators are preferred.
  • the photocleavable photoradical polymerization initiator is described in the latest UV curing technology (P.159, issuer; Kazuhiro Takasawa, publisher; Technical Information Association, published in 1991).
  • Examples of commercially available photocleavable photoradical polymerization initiators include Irgacure (651, 184, 127, 907, trade names) manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably used in the range of 0.1 to 15 parts by mass, more preferably in the range of 1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the curable resin.
  • a photosensitizer may be used.
  • Specific examples of the photosensitizer include n-butylamine, triethylamine, tri-n-butylphosphine, Michler's ketone and thioxanthone.
  • Examples of commercially available photosensitizers include KAYACURE (DMBI, EPA, both trade names) manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • the photopolymerization reaction is preferably carried out by UV irradiation after the application of the high refractive index layer and drying.
  • the transparent resin cured layer may be added with an oligomer or polymer having a mass average molecular weight of 500 or more, or both for imparting brittleness.
  • the oligomer and polymer include (meth) acrylate-based, cellulose-based, and styrene-based polymers, urethane acrylate, and polyester acrylate.
  • Preferable examples include poly (glycidyl (meth) acrylate) and poly (allyl (meth) acrylate) having a functional group in the side chain.
  • the total amount of oligomer and polymer in the transparent resin cured layer is preferably 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably 25 to 70% by mass, and particularly preferably 35 to 65% by mass with respect to the total mass of the resin layer. It is.
  • the strength of the transparent resin cured layer is preferably H or more, more preferably 2H or more, and most preferably 3H or more in a pencil hardness test according to JIS K5400. Further, in the Taber test according to JIS K5400, the smaller the wear amount of the test piece before and after the test, the better.
  • the crosslinking reaction or the polymerization reaction is preferably performed in an atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 10% by volume or less. . By forming in an atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 10% by volume or less, a transparent resin cured layer excellent in physical strength and durability can be formed, which is preferable.
  • it is formed by a crosslinking reaction or polymerization reaction of an ionizing radiation curable compound in an atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 6% by volume or less, more preferably an oxygen concentration of 4% by volume or less, particularly preferably an oxygen concentration of 2 Volume% or less, most preferably 1 volume% or less.
  • an atmosphere nitrogen concentration of about 79% by volume, oxygen concentration of about 21% by volume
  • nitrogen nitrogen purge
  • the polarizing film of the present invention may be formed on a substrate.
  • a substrate for example, a non-alkali glass, soda glass, pyrex (registered trademark) glass, quartz glass, a solid-state image sensor used for a liquid crystal display element, an OLED element, etc., for example, a silicon substrate, etc.
  • a plastic substrate and those obtained by attaching a transparent conductive film, a color filter film, an electrode, and a TFT to them.
  • a black matrix for isolating each pixel may be formed, or a transparent resin layer may be provided for promoting adhesion.
  • the plastic substrate has a gas barrier layer and / or a solvent resistant layer on the surface thereof.
  • the light transmittance of the substrate used in the present invention is preferably 80% or more.
  • the plastic substrate is preferably an optically isotropic polymer film.
  • the description in paragraph [0013] of JP-A-2002-22294 can be applied.
  • a conventionally known polymer such as polycarbonate or polysulfone that easily develops birefringence is used by reducing the expression by modifying the molecule described in International Publication WO00 / 26705. You can also.
  • the present invention relates to a liquid crystal cell having the polarizing film of the present invention inside. More specifically, the present invention relates to a liquid crystal cell having a pair of substrates and a liquid crystal layer, a color filter layer, and the polarizing film of the present invention disposed therebetween.
  • the polarizing film of the present invention will be used, for example, as a polarizing layer that contributes to reducing the depolarization of linearly polarized light entering the cell and the generation of scattered light. In order to sufficiently exhibit this function, it is preferable to dispose the polarizing film of the present invention between the color filter layer and the liquid crystal layer.
  • the polarizing film of the present invention can be directly formed on the surface of a color filter substrate, for example, by the above method.
  • the transfer material described below may be used for transfer. That is, an example of a method for producing a liquid crystal cell using the polarizing film of the present invention includes a method including forming the polarizing film by transferring it from a transfer material. By forming a polarizing film using a transfer material, the number of steps can be reduced, and a cell and a display device with good display characteristics can be manufactured by a simple method.
  • the transfer material that can be used in the present invention has at least a support and a polarizing film. Furthermore, it is preferable to have at least one photosensitive resin layer on the polarizing film.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is useful because it facilitates the transfer of the polarizing film even when the process such as patterning is not performed.
  • there may be a layer for controlling mechanical properties such as cushioning for absorbing irregularities on the counterpart substrate side during transfer, or for imparting irregularity followability.
  • a layer functioning as an alignment layer for controlling the alignment of the dye of the polarizing film may be disposed, or both layers may be provided.
  • the support used for the above transfer material may be transparent or opaque and is not particularly limited.
  • the polymer constituting the support include cellulose ester (eg, cellulose acetate, cellulose propionate, cellulose butyrate, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose acetate butyrate), polyolefin (eg, norbornene-based polymer), poly (Meth) acrylic acid esters (eg, polymethyl methacrylate), polycarbonate, polyester and polysulfone are included.
  • the transparent support is preferably a transparent and low birefringent material, and cellulose ester and norbornene are preferred from the viewpoint of low birefringence.
  • the polarizing film is formed on the support by a method using the coating.
  • an alignment film may be formed on the support, and a polarizing film may be formed thereon by coating.
  • the polarizing film included in the transfer material does not need to satisfy the optical characteristics sufficient for the polarization performance.
  • the polarization performance is expressed or changed through the exposure process performed in the transfer process, and the final film is obtained.
  • the polarizing film may exhibit a polarizing performance necessary for the polarizing film.
  • the transfer material preferably has a photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is made of a photosensitive resin composition, and the photosensitive resin layer includes at least (1) an alkali-soluble resin, (2) a monomer or an oligomer, and (3) a photopolymerization initiator or photopolymerization. It is preferable to form from the resin composition containing an initiator system.
  • Alkali-soluble resin (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “binder”) is preferably a polymer having a polar group such as a carboxylic acid group or a carboxylic acid group in the side chain. Examples thereof include JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12577, JP-B-54-25957, JP-A-59-53836, and JP-A-57-36.
  • Methacrylic acid copolymer acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partially esterified maleic acid copolymer as described in JP-A-59-71048 Etc.
  • the cellulose derivative which has a carboxylic acid group in a side chain can also be mentioned, In addition to this, what added the cyclic acid anhydride to the polymer which has a hydroxyl group can also be used preferably.
  • the binder polymer having these polar groups may be used alone or in the state of a composition used in combination with a normal film-forming polymer, and contained in the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition.
  • the amount is generally 20 to 50% by mass, preferably 25 to 45% by mass.
  • the monomer or oligomer used in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably a monomer or oligomer that has two or more ethylenically unsaturated double bonds and undergoes addition polymerization by light irradiation.
  • Examples of such monomers and oligomers include compounds having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group in the molecule and having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher at normal pressure.
  • Examples include monofunctional acrylates and monofunctional methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) ) Acrylate, trimethylolethane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane diacrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, di Pentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, hexane All di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxy
  • urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-B-50-6034 and JP-A-51-37193; JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49-43191 And polyester acrylates described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 52-30490; polyfunctional acrylates such as epoxy acrylates which are reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth) acrylic acid, and methacrylates.
  • trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, and dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate are preferable.
  • polymerizable compound B described in JP-A-11-133600 can also be mentioned as a preferable example. These monomers or oligomers may be used alone or in admixture of two or more.
  • the content of the photosensitive resin composition with respect to the total solid content is generally 5 to 50% by mass, and 10 to 40% by mass. % Is preferred.
  • Photopolymerization initiator or photopolymerization initiator system As the photopolymerization initiator or photopolymerization initiator system used in the photosensitive resin layer, a vicinal poly disclosed in US Pat. No. 2,367,660 is used. Ketaldonyl compounds, acyloin ether compounds described in US Pat. No. 2,448,828, aromatic acyloin compounds substituted with ⁇ -hydrocarbons described in US Pat. No. 2,722,512, US Pat. No. 3,046,127 And a polynuclear quinone compound described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,951,758, a combination of a triarylimidazole dimer described in U.S. Pat. No.
  • photopolymerization initiators or photopolymerization initiator systems may be used singly or as a mixture of two or more, but it is particularly preferable to use two or more. When at least two kinds of photopolymerization initiators are used, display characteristics, particularly display unevenness, can be reduced.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator or photopolymerization initiator system with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is generally 0.5 to 20% by mass, and preferably 1 to 15% by mass.
  • thermoplastic resin layer between the support and the polarizing film of the transfer material in order to control the mechanical properties and the unevenness followability.
  • the component used in the thermoplastic resin layer is preferably an organic polymer substance described in JP-A-5-72724, and is a polymer softening point according to the Viker Vicat method (specifically, American Material Testing Method ASTM D1 ASTM D1235). It is particularly preferable that the softening point by the measurement method is selected from organic polymer substances having a temperature of about 80 ° C. or less.
  • polyolefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, ethylene copolymers such as ethylene and vinyl acetate or saponified products thereof, ethylene and acrylic acid esters or saponified products thereof, polyvinyl chloride, vinyl chloride and vinyl acetate and saponified products thereof.
  • Vinyl chloride copolymer such as fluoride, polyvinylidene chloride, vinylidene chloride copolymer, polystyrene, styrene copolymer such as styrene and (meth) acrylic acid ester or saponified product thereof, polyvinyl toluene, vinyl toluene and (meta ) Vinyl toluene copolymer such as acrylic ester or saponified product thereof, poly (meth) acrylic ester, (meth) acrylic ester copolymer such as butyl (meth) acrylate and vinyl acetate, vinyl acetate copolymer Combined nylon, copolymer nylon, N-alkoxyme Le nylon, and organic polymeric polyamide resins such as N- dimethylamino nylon.
  • an intermediate layer for the purpose of preventing mixing of components during application of a plurality of application layers and during storage after application.
  • an oxygen-blocking film having an oxygen-blocking function described as “separation layer” in JP-A-5-72724. This reduces the time load and improves productivity.
  • the oxygen barrier film is preferably one that exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an aqueous alkali solution, and can be appropriately selected from known ones. Among these, a combination of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl pyrrolidone is particularly preferable.
  • thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer can also be used as the alignment layer.
  • polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl pyrrolidone preferably used for the intermediate layer are also effective as an alignment layer, and it is preferable that the intermediate layer and the alignment layer are made into one layer.
  • the protective film may be made of the same or similar material as the temporary support, but must be easily separated from the resin layer.
  • the protective film material for example, silicon paper, polyolefin or polytetrafluoroethylene sheet is suitable.
  • the polarizing film and the photosensitive resin layer, and the alignment layer, the thermoplastic resin layer, and the intermediate layer formed as desired can be formed by the same method as the polarizing film forming method. Two or more layers may be applied simultaneously. The methods of simultaneous application are described in US Pat. Nos. 2,761,791, 2,941,898, 3,508,947, and 3,526,528 and Yuji Harasaki, Coating Engineering, page 253, Asakura Shoten (1973).
  • the method for transferring the transfer material on the substrate in the present invention is not particularly limited, and the method is not particularly limited as long as the polarizing film and the photosensitive resin layer can be simultaneously transferred onto the substrate.
  • the transfer material referred to in the present invention formed in a film shape is attached by pressing or thermocompression bonding with a roller or flat plate heated and / or pressurized using a laminator with the photosensitive resin layer side facing the substrate surface side.
  • Specific examples include laminators and laminating methods described in JP-A-7-110575, JP-A-11-77942, JP-A-2000-334836, and JP-A-2002-148794. From this point of view, it is preferable to use the method described in JP-A-7-110575.
  • the support may be peeled off, and another layer such as an electrode layer may be formed on the surface of the polarizing film exposed by peeling.
  • the substrate that is a transfer material to which the transfer material is transferred.
  • a soda glass plate having a silicon oxide film on the surface a known glass plate such as a low expansion glass, a non-alkali glass, a quartz glass plate, or a plastic film can be used.
  • the material to be transferred may be one in which a layer such as a color filter is provided on a transparent substrate.
  • the material to be transferred can be well adhered to the photosensitive resin layer by performing a coupling treatment in advance.
  • a method described in JP 2000-39033 A is preferably used.
  • the thickness of the substrate is generally preferably 700 to 1200 ⁇ m.
  • an adhesive layer may be provided on the transfer material.
  • the present invention relates to a display device having at least the polarizing film of the present invention.
  • the display device of the present invention may be, for example, a TN, STN, VA, ECB, IPS, or OCB mode transmissive, reflective, or transflective liquid crystal display device; and an OLED.
  • Particularly preferred is a display device in which the polarizing film of the present invention is disposed on the inner surface side of the substrate (so-called in-cell polarizing film), and particularly preferred is a laminate of the polarizing film of the present invention on a color filter substrate. It is a display device.
  • Dichroic ratio (D) Az / Ay Az: Absorbance with respect to polarized light in the absorption axis direction of the light absorption anisotropic film
  • Ay Absorbance with respect to polarization in the polarization axis direction of the light absorption anisotropic film
  • Example 1 Synthesis example of dichroic dye A-2
  • a dichroic dye A-2 having the following structure was synthesized according to the following scheme.
  • dichroic dye A-2 1.00 part of Compound 2 was dissolved in 10 ml of THF, 0.28 part of methanesulfonyl chloride was added, and this was cooled to -5 ° C. A solution prepared by dissolving 0.32 parts of DIPEA (diisopropylethylamine) in 2 ml of THF was added dropwise little by little while maintaining a temperature of 0 ° C. or lower. This reaction solution was added dropwise little by little while maintaining a temperature of 0 ° C. or less in a solution of 0.36 parts of 4-butylphenol and 0.32 parts of DIPEA in 5 ml of THF.
  • DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
  • reaction solution was warmed to room temperature, and 20 ml of water and 20 ml of methanol were added.
  • the precipitated crystals were filtered, washed with methanol, and dried to obtain 0.80 part of A-2.
  • ⁇ max of A-2 in the N-methylpyrrolidone solvent was 522.9 nm. That is, it was a magenta dye.
  • Example 2 Synthesis example of dichroic dye A-9
  • a dichroic dye A-9 having the following structure was synthesized according to the following synthesis scheme.
  • reaction solution was returned to room temperature, 30 ml of methanol was added, the precipitated crystals were filtered, washed with methanol, and dried to obtain 0.92 parts of A-9.
  • ⁇ max of A-9 in N-methylpyrrolidone solvent was 521.0 nm. That is, it was a magenta dye.
  • a dichroic dye A-26 having the following structure was synthesized according to the following synthesis scheme.
  • reaction solution was warmed to room temperature, and 116 ml of water was added dropwise thereto. After neutralizing the reaction solution with sodium hydrogen carbonate, the precipitated product was filtered, washed with water and methanol, and dried. After drying, 21.0 parts of compound 5 were obtained.
  • A-26 has liquid crystallinity, and a nematic phase was confirmed in the range of 170 ° C. to 200 ° C. when the temperature was lowered. Moreover, it was confirmed that it was a dichroic dye by observation with a polarizing microscope.
  • Example 4 1 part by mass of dichroic dye A-2 was added to 99 parts by mass of chloroform, dissolved by stirring and filtered to obtain a dichroic dye composition coating solution. Next, the coating solution was applied onto an alignment film formed on a glass substrate and rubbed, and then the film was naturally dried at room temperature to form a film. The following polyvinyl alcohol was used as the alignment film.
  • the dichroic ratio obtained from the absorbance (Az) for polarized light having a vibration plane in the absorption axis direction in the plane of the film and the absorbance (Ay) for polarized light having a vibration plane in the direction of the polarization axis in the film plane ( D) was 18. That is, it was found that the obtained film had light absorption anisotropy and could function as a polarizing film.
  • Example 5 1 part by mass of dichroic dye A-9 was added to 99 parts by mass of chloroform, dissolved by stirring and filtered to obtain a dichroic dye composition coating solution. Using this coating solution, a film was prepared in the same manner as in Example 4. The dichroic ratio obtained from the absorbance (Az) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the in-plane absorption axis direction and the absorbance (Ay) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the direction of the polarization axis in the film ( D) was 58. That is, it was found that the obtained film had light absorption anisotropy and could function as a polarizing film.
  • Example 6 Add 0.5 parts by weight of dichroic dye A-9 and 0.5 parts by weight of dichroic dye A-26 to 99 parts by weight of chloroform, stir and dissolve, and filter to obtain a dichroic dye composition coating solution. Obtained. Using this coating solution, a film having a thickness of 0.05 to 0.2 ⁇ m was produced in the same manner as in Example 4. The dichroic ratio obtained from the absorbance (Az) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the in-plane absorption axis direction and the absorbance (Ay) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the direction of the polarization axis in the film ( D) was 37. That is, it was found that the obtained film had light absorption anisotropy and could function as a polarizing film.
  • Example 7 Add 0.3 parts by weight of dichroic dye A-9, 0.3 parts by weight of dichroic dye A-26, and 0.4 parts by weight of dichroic dye B below to 99 parts by weight of chloroform, and dissolve with stirring. After filtration, a dichroic dye composition coating solution was obtained.
  • the dichroic dye B has an absorption maximum wavelength in NMP of 615.0 nm, that is, a cyan dye, has a nematic phase in the range of 209 ° C. to 227 ° C., and is observed with a polarizing microscope. Was confirmed to be a dichroic dye.
  • a film was prepared in the same manner as in Example 4.
  • Example 8 To 99 parts by mass of chloroform, 0.4 part by mass of dichroic dye A-26 and 0.6 part by mass of dichroic dye B were added, dissolved by stirring, and filtered to obtain a dichroic dye composition coating solution. . Using this coating solution, a film having a thickness of 0.05 to 0.2 ⁇ m was produced in the same manner as in Example 4. The dichroic ratio obtained from the absorbance (Az) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the in-plane absorption axis direction and the absorbance (Ay) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the direction of the polarization axis in the film ( D) was 28.

Abstract

Provided is a dichroic dye composition which exhibits a high dichroic ratio and excellent orientation properties. The dichroic dye composition contains at least one liquid-crystalline dichroic dye represented by general formula (I): Ar1-N=N-Ar2-L1-Ar3-L2-Ar4 [wherein Ar1 to Ar4 are each an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group or a cyclohexane ring group, each group being optionally substituted; L1 and L2 are each an azo group, an ester group, an inimo group, or a vinylene group, with the proviso that L1 and L2 are not both azo groups].

Description

二色性色素組成物、偏光膜、液晶セル、及び表示装置Dichroic dye composition, polarizing film, liquid crystal cell, and display device
 本発明は、偏光膜等の種々の用途の膜の形成に有用な二色性色素組成物、及びそれを利用して形成した偏光膜に関する。また、本発明は、該偏光膜を有する液晶セル及び液晶表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a dichroic dye composition useful for forming a film for various uses such as a polarizing film, and a polarizing film formed using the same. The present invention also relates to a liquid crystal cell and a liquid crystal display device having the polarizing film.
 従来、有機系の二色性色素を利用して形成される偏光素子が検討されている。
 その一例として、ヨウ素を含む偏光素子と同様に、二色性を有する有機色素(二色性色素)をポリビニルアルコールのような高分子材料に溶解又は吸着させ、その膜を一方向にフィルム状に延伸して二色性色素を配向させて作製される偏光子が提案されている。しかしながら、この方法により作製すると、延伸処理等のプロセスに手間がかかる等の問題がある。
 そこで、最近では他の方法が着目されるようになってきた。この方法として、非特許文献1では、ガラスや透明フィルムなどの基板上に有機色素分子の分子間相互作用などを利用して二色性色素を配向させ、偏光膜(異方性色素膜)を形成する方法がある。しかしながら、該文献に記載の方法では、耐熱性の問題がある。
Conventionally, a polarizing element formed using an organic dichroic dye has been studied.
As an example, like a polarizing element containing iodine, an organic dye having a dichroism (dichroic dye) is dissolved or adsorbed in a polymer material such as polyvinyl alcohol, and the film is formed into a film in one direction. A polarizer prepared by stretching and orienting a dichroic dye has been proposed. However, when produced by this method, there is a problem that a process such as a stretching process is troublesome.
Therefore, other methods have recently attracted attention. As this method, in Non-Patent Document 1, a dichroic dye is oriented on a substrate such as glass or transparent film by utilizing intermolecular interaction of organic dye molecules, and a polarizing film (anisotropic dye film) is formed. There is a method of forming. However, the method described in this document has a problem of heat resistance.
 また、ガラスや透明フィルムなどの基板上に有機色素分子の分子間相互作用などを利用して二色性色素を配向させる湿式成膜法により、偏光子を作製することも提案されている。湿式成膜法におけるプロセスとしては、色素を基板上に堆積、配向させる方法やその配向を制御する方法などが挙げられる。特許文献1~3には、上記プロセスに適した材料が提案されている。また、前記プロセスに適した材料として、特許文献4では、(クロモゲン)(SO3M)nで表される色素が提案されている。 In addition, it has also been proposed to produce a polarizer by a wet film forming method in which a dichroic dye is oriented on a substrate such as glass or a transparent film using intermolecular interaction of organic dye molecules. Examples of the process in the wet film forming method include a method for depositing and orienting a dye on a substrate and a method for controlling the orientation. Patent Documents 1 to 3 propose materials suitable for the above process. In addition, as a material suitable for the process, Patent Document 4 proposes a dye represented by (chromogen) (SO 3 M) n.
 一方、液晶セル内に配置されるカラーフィルタ層に入射した直線偏光が偏光解消されることによって生じる散乱光を軽減するため、液晶セル内に偏光層を配置することが提案されている(例えば、特許文献5及び6)。 On the other hand, in order to reduce scattered light caused by depolarization of linearly polarized light incident on a color filter layer disposed in a liquid crystal cell, it has been proposed to dispose a polarizing layer in the liquid crystal cell (for example, Patent Documents 5 and 6).
特開2002-180052号公報Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-180052 特表2002-528758号公報JP-T-2002-528758 特開2002-338838号公報JP 2002-338838 A 特表平8-511109号公報JP-T 8-511109 特開平10-161105号公報JP-A-10-161105 特開2008-90317号公報JP 2008-90317 A
 近年、種々の表示機器等には、薄型化の要求があり、それに利用される偏光膜にも、高い偏光度を薄い膜厚で達成することが要求される。特に、セル内に配置された偏光層には、この特性が強く要求される。そのためには、高い二色比を示し、配向性が良好な二色性色素組成物が有効である。
 本発明は、高い二色比を示し、配向性が良好な二色性色素組成物を提供することを課題とする。
 また、本発明は、高い偏光度を薄い膜厚で達成可能な偏光膜の作製に有用な、二色性色素組成物を提供することを課題とする。
 また、本発明は、液晶セル内に配置される偏光膜の形成に有用な二色性色素組成物を提供することを課題とする。
 また、本発明は、高い偏光度を薄い膜厚で達成可能な偏光膜、該偏光膜を有する液晶セル及び表示装置を提供することを課題とする。
In recent years, various display devices and the like have been required to be thin, and a polarizing film used therefor is also required to achieve a high degree of polarization with a thin film thickness. In particular, this characteristic is strongly required for the polarizing layer disposed in the cell. For this purpose, a dichroic dye composition that exhibits a high dichroic ratio and good orientation is effective.
An object of the present invention is to provide a dichroic dye composition having a high dichroic ratio and good orientation.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a dichroic dye composition useful for producing a polarizing film capable of achieving a high degree of polarization with a thin film thickness.
Moreover, this invention makes it a subject to provide a dichroic dye composition useful for formation of the polarizing film arrange | positioned in a liquid crystal cell.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a polarizing film capable of achieving a high degree of polarization with a thin film thickness, a liquid crystal cell having the polarizing film, and a display device.
 前記課題を解決するための手段は、以下の通りである。
[1]下記一般式(I)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素を少なくとも1種含有する二色性色素組成物:
Means for solving the above problems are as follows.
[1] Dichroic dye composition containing at least one dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (I):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
式中、Ar1~Ar4はそれぞれ置換基を有してもよい、芳香族炭化水素基、芳香族複素環基及びシクロヘキサン環基を表し;L1及びL2はそれぞれ、アゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し、但し、L1とL2が共にアゾ基になることはない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
In the formula, each of Ar 1 to Ar 4 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group and a cyclohexane ring group, each of which may have a substituent; L 1 and L 2 are an azo group and an ester group, respectively. Represents an imino group or a vinylene group, provided that L 1 and L 2 are not both azo groups.
[2]液晶性の非着色材料を実質的に含有しない[1]の二色性色素組成物。
[3]前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種が、下記一般式(II)で表される化合物である[1]又は[2]の二色性色素組成物:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
式中、L11及びL12はそれぞれ、アゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し、但し、L11とL12が共にアゾ基になることはなく;R11~R15はそれぞれ、水素原子もしくは置換基を表し、R11とR13は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A1は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
[2] The dichroic dye composition according to [1] which does not substantially contain a liquid crystalline non-colored material.
[3] The dichroic dye composition of [1] or [2], wherein at least one of the dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) is a compound represented by the following general formula (II): :
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Wherein, L 11 and L 12 are each, azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group, provided that never L 11 and L 12 is an azo group together; R 11 ~ R 15 each Represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 11 and R 13 may form a ring with each other; A 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
[4]一般式(II)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素を少なくとも2種以上含有し、該2種以上の二色性色素のうち少なくとも1種が、式(II)中、L11がアゾ基である化合物である[3]の二色性色素組成物。
[5]前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種が、下記一般式(III)で表される化合物である[1]~[4]のいずれかの二色性色素組成物:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
式中、L21はエステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;L22はアゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R21~R25はそれぞれ、水素原子又は置換基を表し、R21とR23は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A2は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
[4] It contains at least two dichroic dyes having liquid crystallinity represented by the general formula (II), and at least one of the two or more dichroic dyes is represented by the formula (II) The dichroic dye composition of [3], wherein L 11 is a compound having an azo group.
[5] The dichroism of any one of [1] to [4], wherein at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (I) is a compound represented by the following general formula (III): Dye composition:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
In the formula, L 21 represents an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; L 22 represents an azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 21 to R 25 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. R 21 and R 23 may form a ring with each other; A 2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
[6]前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種が、下記一般式(IV)で表される化合物である[1]~[5]のいずれかの二色性色素組成物:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
式中、L31はイミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R31~R35はそれぞれ水素原子もしくは置換基を表し、R31とR33は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A3は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
[6] The dichroism of any one of [1] to [5], wherein at least one of the dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) is a compound represented by the following general formula (IV) Dye composition:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Represents wherein, L 31 is an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 31 ~ R 35 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 31 and R 33 may form a mutually ring; A 3 is a substituted Alternatively, it represents an unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
[7]R11、R12、R21、R22、R31及びR32がそれぞれ、炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基であり;R13、R23及びR33がそれぞれ、水素原子であり;R14、R24、R34、R15、R25及びR35がそれぞれ、水素原子、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素原子数1~6の、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基であり;A1、A2及びA3が窒素原子、又は炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい、炭素原子数1~6のアルコキシ基、シアノ基、又は置換アミノ基で置換された炭素原子である[4]~[6]のいずれかの二色性色素組成物。
[8]マゼンタ色素及び/又はイエロー色素として、前記一般式(I)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素を少なくとも1種含有する[1]~[7]のいずれかの二色性色素組成物。
[9]イエロー色素として、一般式(III)で表される化合物の少なくとも1種を含有する[8]の二色性色素組成物。
[10]マゼンタ色素として、一般式(IV)で表される化合物の少なくとも1種を含有する[8]又は[9]の二色性色素組成物。
[11]シアン色素として、液晶性を有する二色性アゾ色素の少なくとも1種をさらに含有する[1]~[10]のいずれかの二色性色素組成物。
[12][1]~[11]のいずれかの二色性色素組成物からなる偏光膜。
[13]塗布によって形成される[12]の偏光膜。
[14]光源としてC光源を用いたときの透過光が、xy色度図において、0.28<x<0.36、0.28<y<0.36を満足する[13]の偏光膜。
[15]一対の基板と、その間に配置された、液晶層、カラーフィルタ層、及び[12]~[14]のいずれかの偏光膜を有する液晶セル。
[16]前記偏光膜を、前記カラーフィルタ層と前記液晶層との間に有する[15]の液晶セル。
[17][12]~[14]のいずれかの偏光膜を有する表示装置。
[18][15]又は[16]の液晶セルを有する液晶表示装置。
[7] R 11 , R 12 , R 21 , R 22 , R 31 and R 32 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; R 13 , R 23 and R 33 are each R 14 , R 24 , R 34 , R 15 , R 25, and R 35 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a plurality of carbon atoms having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. An alkoxy group which may contain a hetero atom; A 1 , A 2 and A 3 may contain a nitrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a plurality of hetero atoms The dichroic dye composition according to any one of [4] to [6], which is a carbon atom substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group.
[8] The two colors according to any one of [1] to [7], containing at least one dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the general formula (I) as a magenta dye and / or a yellow dye Pigment composition.
[9] The dichroic dye composition according to [8] containing at least one compound represented by formula (III) as a yellow dye.
[10] The dichroic dye composition according to [8] or [9], which contains at least one compound represented by formula (IV) as a magenta dye.
[11] The dichroic dye composition according to any one of [1] to [10], further containing at least one dichroic azo dye having liquid crystallinity as a cyan dye.
[12] A polarizing film comprising the dichroic dye composition according to any one of [1] to [11].
[13] The polarizing film of [12] formed by coating.
[14] The polarizing film according to [13], wherein transmitted light when a C light source is used as the light source satisfies 0.28 <x <0.36 and 0.28 <y <0.36 in the xy chromaticity diagram .
[15] A liquid crystal cell having a pair of substrates, a liquid crystal layer, a color filter layer, and a polarizing film of any one of [12] to [14] disposed therebetween.
[16] The liquid crystal cell according to [15], wherein the polarizing film is provided between the color filter layer and the liquid crystal layer.
[17] A display device having the polarizing film of any one of [12] to [14].
[18] A liquid crystal display device having the liquid crystal cell of [15] or [16].
[19]下記一般式(III)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
式中、L21はエステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;L22はアゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R11~R15はそれぞれ、水素原子又は置換基を表し、R11とR13は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A2は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
[19] Dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (III):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
In the formula, L 21 represents an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; L 22 represents an azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 11 to R 15 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. R 11 and R 13 may form a ring with each other; A 2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
[20]R21及びR22がそれぞれ、炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基であり;R23がそれぞれ、水素原子であり;R24及びR25がそれぞれ、水素原子、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素原子数1~6の、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基であり;A2が窒素原子、又は炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい、炭素原子数1~6のアルコキシ基、シアノ基、又は置換アミノ基で置換された炭素原子である[19]の二色性色素。 [20] R 21 and R 22 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; R 23 is a hydrogen atom; R 24 and R 25 are a hydrogen atom or a carbon atom, respectively. An alkyl group having 1 to 6 atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms; A 2 is a nitrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; [19] The dichroic dye according to [19], which is a substituted alkyl group, a carbon atom substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group, which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms.
[21]下記一般式(IV)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
式中、L31はイミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R31~R35はそれぞれ水素原子もしくは置換基を表し、R31とR33は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A3は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
[21] A dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (IV):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Represents wherein, L 31 is an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 31 ~ R 35 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 31 and R 33 may form a mutually ring; A 3 is a substituted Alternatively, it represents an unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
[22]R31及びR32がそれぞれ、炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基であり;R33が、水素原子であり;R34及びR35がそれぞれ、水素原子、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素原子数1~6の、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基であり;A3が窒素原子、又は炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい、炭素原子数1~6のアルコキシ基、シアノ基、又は置換アミノ基で置換された炭素原子である[21]の二色性色素。 [22] R 31 and R 32 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; R 33 is a hydrogen atom; R 34 and R 35 are a hydrogen atom and a carbon atom, respectively. An alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms; A 3 is a nitrogen atom, or substituted or unsubstituted having 1 to 6 carbon atoms [21] The dichroic dye of [21], which is a carbon atom substituted with an alkyl group, a plurality of heteroatoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group.
 本発明の二色性色素組成物は、高い二色比を示し、配向性が良好である。よって、本発明の二色性色素組成物によれば、高い偏光度を薄い膜厚で達成可能な偏光膜を提供することができる。また、本発明によれば、液晶セル内に配置される偏光膜の形成に有用な二色性色素組成物を提供することができる。さらに、本発明によれば、高い偏光度を薄い膜厚で達成可能な偏光膜、該偏光膜を有する液晶セル及び液晶表示装置を提供することができる。 The dichroic dye composition of the present invention exhibits a high dichroic ratio and good orientation. Therefore, according to the dichroic dye composition of the present invention, a polarizing film capable of achieving a high degree of polarization with a thin film thickness can be provided. Moreover, according to this invention, the dichroic dye composition useful for formation of the polarizing film arrange | positioned in a liquid crystal cell can be provided. Furthermore, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a polarizing film capable of achieving a high degree of polarization with a thin film thickness, a liquid crystal cell having the polarizing film, and a liquid crystal display device.
 以下、本発明について詳細に説明する。なお、本明細書において「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用される。
1.二色性色素組成物
1.-1 二色性色素
 本発明は、下記一般式(I)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素を少なくとも1種含有する二色性色素組成物に関する。
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail. In the present specification, “to” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
1. Dichroic dye composition -1 Dichroic dye The present invention relates to a dichroic dye composition containing at least one dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (I).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式中、Ar1~Ar4はそれぞれ置換基を有してもよい、芳香族炭化水素基、芳香族複素環基及びシクロヘキサン環基を表し;L1及びL2はそれぞれ、アゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し、但し、L1とL2が共にアゾ基になることはない。 In the formula, each of Ar 1 to Ar 4 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group and a cyclohexane ring group, each of which may have a substituent; L 1 and L 2 are an azo group and an ester group, respectively. Represents an imino group or a vinylene group, provided that L 1 and L 2 are not both azo groups.
 上記一般式中、Ar1は、置換基を有してもよい、芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基が好ましく;置換基を有していてもよい、フェニル基又はナフチル基であるのがより好ましく;置換基を有していてもよい、フェニル基であるのがさらに好ましい。
 Ar1が有する置換基の例には、置換もしくは無置換のアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数0~20、より好ましくは炭素数0~10、特に好ましくは炭素数0~6のアミノ基であり、例えば、無置換アミノ基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、アニリノ基などが挙げられる)、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基などが挙げられる)が好ましく;置換もしくは無置換のアミノ基がより好ましい。特に、Ar1は、アゾ基に対してパラ位に置換もしくは無置換のアミノ基を有するフェニル基であるのが好ましく、パラ位以外は、無置換であるのが好ましい。
In the above general formula, Ar 1 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent; it may be a phenyl group or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent. Is more preferable; it is more preferably a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent of Ar 1 include a substituted or unsubstituted amino group (preferably an amino group having 0 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 0 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 0 to 6 carbon atoms, For example, an unsubstituted amino group, a methylamino group, a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, an anilino group, etc.), a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, especially Preferably, it has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a butoxy group); a substituted or unsubstituted amino group is more preferable. In particular, Ar 1 is preferably a phenyl group having a substituted or unsubstituted amino group at the para position relative to the azo group, and is preferably unsubstituted except for the para position.
 上記一般式中、Ar2は置換基を有してもよい、芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基が好ましく;置換基を有していてもよい、フェニレン基又はナフチレン基がより好ましく;置換基を有していてもよい、フェニレン基がさらに好ましい。
 Ar2が有する置換基の例には、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~12、特に好ましくは炭素数1~8のアルキル基であり、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、tert-ブチル基、n-オクチル基、n-デシル基、n-ヘキサデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基などが挙げられる)、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基などが挙げられる。ヘテロ原子を含むアルコキシ基としては、例えば、-(OCH2CH2nOXで表されるオリゴエチレンオキシ基であり、nは1~10の整数を表し、好ましくは1~6であり、より好ましくは1~3であり、Xは水素原子もしくは炭素数1~3のアルキル基を表す)、ハロゲン原子(例えばフッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、及びヒドロキシ基が好ましく;中でも、アルキル基、及び複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基がより好ましい。特に、Ar2は、無置換のフェニレン基であるか、又はアルキル基を有するフェニレン基であるのが好ましい。
In the above general formula, Ar 2 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent; an phenylene group or a naphthylene group which may have a substituent is more preferable; A phenylene group which may have a substituent is more preferable.
Examples of the substituent that Ar 2 has include an optionally substituted alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms). Groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl, n-decyl, n-hexadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl , A cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkoxy group which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, for example, the alkoxy group containing a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group heteroatoms such, -. (OCH 2 CH 2 ) represented by n OX N represents an integer of 1 to 10, preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and X represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. ), A halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom) and a hydroxy group are preferable; among them, an alkyl group and an alkoxy group which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms are more preferable. In particular, Ar 2 is preferably an unsubstituted phenylene group or a phenylene group having an alkyl group.
 上記一般式中、Ar3は置換基を有してもよい、芳香族炭化水素基、芳香族複素環基又はシクロヘキサン環基が好ましく;置換基を有していてもよい、フェニレン基、又はナフチレン基がより好ましく;置換基を有していてもよい、フェニレン基であるのがさらに好ましい。Ar2が有する置換基の例は、Ar2が有する置換基の例と同様であり好ましい範囲も同様である。 In the above general formula, Ar 3 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic heterocyclic group or cyclohexane ring group which may have a substituent; a phenylene group or naphthylene which may have a substituent; A group is more preferable; a phenylene group which may have a substituent is more preferable. Examples of substituents which Ar 2 has are the same as examples of the substituent Ar 2 has preferred ranges are also the same.
 上記一般式中、Ar4は置換基を有してもよい、芳香族炭化水素基、芳香族複素環基又はシクロヘキサン環基が好ましく;置換基を有していてもよい、フェニル基、ナフチル基、又はピリジル基がより好ましく;置換基を有していてもよい、フェニル基、又はピリジル基がさらに好ましい。
 Ar4が有する置換基の例には、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~12、特に好ましくは炭素数1~8のアルキル基であり、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、tert-ブチル基、n-オクチル基、n-デシル基、n-ヘキサデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基などが挙げられる)、アルケニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~20、より好ましくは炭素数2~12、特に好ましくは炭素数2~8のアルケニル基であり、例えば、ビニル基、アリル基、2-ブテニル基、3-ペンテニル基などが挙げられる)、アルキニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~20、より好ましくは炭素数2~12、特に好ましくは炭素数2~8のアルキニル基であり、例えば、プロパルギル基、3-ペンチニル基などが挙げられる)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~30、より好ましくは炭素数6~20、特に好ましくは炭素数6~12のアリール基であり、例えば、フェニル基、2,6-ジエチルフェニル基、3,5-ジトリフルオロメチルフェニル基、ナフチル基、ビフェニル基などが挙げられる)、置換もしくは無置換のアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数0~20、より好ましくは炭素数0~10、特に好ましくは炭素数0~6のアミノ基であり、例えば、無置換アミノ基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、アニリノ基などが挙げられる)、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基などが挙げられる。ヘテロ原子を含むアルコキシ基としては、例えば、-(OCH2CH2nOXで表されるオリゴエチレンオキシ基であり、nは1~10の整数を表し、好ましくは1~6であり、より好ましくは1~3であり、Xは水素原子もしくは炭素数1~3のアルキル基を表す)、アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~20、より好ましくは炭素数2~10、特に好ましくは2~6であり、例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基などが挙げられる)、アシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~20、より好ましくは炭素数2~10、特に好ましくは2~6であり、例えば、アセトキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基などが挙げられる)、アシルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~20、より好ましくは炭素数2~10、特に好ましくは炭素数2~6であり、例えばアセチルアミノ基、ベンゾイルアミノ基などが挙げられる)、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~20、より好ましくは炭素数2~10、特に好ましくは炭素数2~6であり、例えば、メトキシカルボニルアミノ基などが挙げられる)、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数7~20、より好ましくは炭素数7~16、特に好ましくは炭素数7~12であり、例えば、フェニルオキシカルボニルアミノ基などが挙げられる)、スルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、メタンスルホニルアミノ基、ベンゼンスルホニルアミノ基などが挙げられる)、スルファモイル基(好ましくは炭素数0~20、より好ましくは炭素数0~10、特に好ましくは炭素数0~6であり、例えば、スルファモイル基、メチルスルファモイル基、ジメチルスルファモイル基、フェニルスルファモイル基などが挙げられる)、カルバモイル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、無置換のカルバモイル基、メチルカルバモイル基、ジエチルカルバモイル基、フェニルカルバモイル基などが挙げられる)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基などが挙げられる)、アリールチオ基(好ましくは炭素数6~20、より好ましくは炭素数6~16、特に好ましくは炭素数6~12であり、例えば、フェニルチオ基などが挙げられる)、スルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、メシル基、トシル基などが挙げられる)、スルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、メタンスルフィニル基、ベンゼンスルフィニル基などが挙げられる)、ウレイド基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、無置換のウレイド基、メチルウレイド基、フェニルウレイド基などが挙げられる)、リン酸アミド基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10、特に好ましくは炭素数1~6であり、例えば、ジエチルリン酸アミド基、フェニルリン酸アミド基などが挙げられる)、ヒドロキシ基、メルカプト基、ハロゲン原子(例えばフッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、シアノ基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキサム酸基、スルフィノ基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基、ヘテロ環基(好ましくは炭素数1~30、より好ましくは1~12のヘテロ環基であり、例えば、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子を有するヘテロ環基であり、例えば、イミダゾリル基、ピリジル基、キノリル基、フリル基、ピペリジル基、モルホリノ基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基、ベンズイミダゾリル基、ベンズチアゾリル基などが挙げられる)、シリル基(好ましくは、炭素数3~40、より好ましくは炭素数3~30、特に好ましくは、炭素数3~24のシリル基であり、例えば、トリメチルシリル基、トリフェニルシリル基などが挙げられる)が好ましく;アルキル基、アリール基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、置換アミノ基がより好ましく;アルキル基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基、シアノ基、置換アミノ基がさらに好ましい。これらの置換基はさらにこれらの置換基によって置換されていてもよい。また、置換基を二つ以上有する場合は、同じでも異なってもよい。また、可能な場合には互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。
 特に、Ar4は、無置換のピリジル基であるか、又はL2に対してパラ位に、アルキル基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基、シアノ基、置換アミノ基を有するフェニル基であるのが好ましい。
In the above general formula, Ar 4 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group or a cyclohexane ring group which may have a substituent; a phenyl group or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent Or a pyridyl group is more preferable; a phenyl group or a pyridyl group which may have a substituent is more preferable.
Examples of the substituent that Ar 4 has include an alkyl group which may have a substituent (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms). Groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl, n-decyl, n-hexadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl , A cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group (preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, etc. , 2-butenyl group, 3-pentenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferred) Or an alkynyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as a propargyl group or 3-pentynyl group, or an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, particularly preferably Is an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a 2,6-diethylphenyl group, a 3,5-ditrifluoromethylphenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a biphenyl group), substituted or unsubstituted Amino group (preferably an amino group having 0 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 0 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 0 to 6 carbon atoms, such as an unsubstituted amino group, a methylamino group, a dimethylamino group, A diethylamino group, an anilino group, etc.), an alkoxy group which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 20, more preferably The number of carbon atoms is 1 to 10, particularly preferably 1 to 6, and includes, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group, etc. As an alkoxy group containing a hetero atom, for example, — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) an oligoethyleneoxy group represented by n OX, n represents an integer of 1 to 10, preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and X is a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 And an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as a methoxycarbonyl group and an ethoxycarbonyl group). Acyloxy groups (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as acetoxy group, Oxy group and the like), acylamino group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as acetylamino group and benzoylamino group). An alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as a methoxycarbonylamino group), aryloxy A carbonylamino group (preferably having a carbon number of 7 to 20, more preferably a carbon number of 7 to 16, particularly preferably a carbon number of 7 to 12, such as a phenyloxycarbonylamino group), a sulfonylamino group (preferably Has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. For example, methanesulfonylamino group, benzenesulfonylamino group, etc.), sulfamoyl group (preferably having 0 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 0 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 0 to 6 carbon atoms, A sulfamoyl group, a methylsulfamoyl group, a dimethylsulfamoyl group, a phenylsulfamoyl group, etc.), a carbamoyl group (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably carbon atoms). For example, an unsubstituted carbamoyl group, a methylcarbamoyl group, a diethylcarbamoyl group, a phenylcarbamoyl group and the like, an alkylthio group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 20, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 10, particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, such as methylthio group, ethyl An arylthio group (preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 16 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a phenylthio group), sulfonyl A group (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as mesyl group and tosyl group), sulfinyl group (preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include methanesulfinyl groups and benzenesulfinyl groups), ureido groups (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, More preferably, it has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include an unsubstituted ureido group, a methylureido group, and a phenylurea. A phosphoric acid amide group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 20, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 10, particularly preferably a carbon number of 1 to 6, such as a diethylphosphoric acid amide group, phenyl Phosphoric acid amide group etc.), hydroxy group, mercapto group, halogen atom (eg fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), cyano group, nitro group, hydroxamic acid group, sulfino group, hydrazino group, imino group Group, a heterocyclic group (preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, for example, a heterocyclic group having a hetero atom such as a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, Imidazolyl, pyridyl, quinolyl, furyl, piperidyl, morpholino, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzil A thiazolyl group), a silyl group (preferably a silyl group having 3 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 3 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 3 to 24 carbon atoms. Phenylsilyl group and the like are preferred; an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group that may contain a plurality of heteroatoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, and a substituted amino group. More preferably; an alkyl group, an alkoxy group optionally containing a plurality of heteroatoms, a cyano group, and a substituted amino group are more preferable. These substituents may be further substituted with these substituents. Moreover, when it has two or more substituents, they may be the same or different. If possible, they may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
In particular, Ar 4 is an unsubstituted pyridyl group or a phenyl having an alkyl group, an alkoxy group that may contain a plurality of heteroatoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group at the para position relative to L 2 . A group is preferred.
 なお、上記一般式で表される化合物は置換基として、重合性基を有していてもよい。重合性基を有していると、硬膜性が良化されるので好ましい。重合性基としては。重合性基の例には、不飽和重合性基、エポキシ基、及びアジリジニル基が含まれ、不飽和重合性基が好ましく、エチレン性不飽和重合性基が特に好ましい。エチレン性不飽和重合性基の例には、アクリロイル基、及びメタクリロイル基が含まれる。
 重合性基は末端に位置するのが好ましく、即ち、Ar1及び/又はAr4の置換基として、存在するのが好ましい。
Note that the compound represented by the above general formula may have a polymerizable group as a substituent. It is preferable to have a polymerizable group because the hardening property is improved. As a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include an unsaturated polymerizable group, an epoxy group, and an aziridinyl group, preferably an unsaturated polymerizable group, and particularly preferably an ethylenically unsaturated polymerizable group. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated polymerizable group include acryloyl group and methacryloyl group.
The polymerizable group is preferably located at the end, ie, preferably present as a substituent for Ar 1 and / or Ar 4 .
 上記一般式中、L1及びL2はそれぞれ、アゾ基(-N=N-)、エステル基(-C(=O)O-もしくは-OC(=O)-)、イミノ基(-CH=N-もしくは-N=CH-)、ビニレン基(-CH=CH-)を表す。L1は、-N=N-、-C(=O)O-、-OC(=O)-、又は-CH=N-が好ましく;-N=N-、-C(=O)O-、又は-CH=N-がより好ましい。L2は、-N=N-、-C(=O)O-、-OC(=O)-、-CH=N-、又は-CH=CH-が好ましく;-N=N-、-C(=O)O-、又は-CH=N-がより好ましい。但し、L1とL2が共にアゾ基になることはない。
 L1とL2の組み合わせの好ましい例としては、(L1/L2)=(-N=N-/-C(=O)O-)、(-N=N-/-CH=N-)、(-N=N-/-CH=CH-)、(-C(=O)O-/-N=N-)、(-C(=O)O-/-CH=CH-)、及び(-CH=N-/-N=N-)であり;(L1/L2)=(-N=N-/-CH=N-)、及び(-C(=O)O-/-N=N-)がより好ましい。
In the above general formula, L 1 and L 2 are each an azo group (—N═N—), an ester group (—C (═O) O— or —OC (═O) —), an imino group (—CH═ N- or -N = CH-) and a vinylene group (-CH = CH-). L 1 is preferably —N═N—, —C (═O) O—, —OC (═O) —, or —CH═N—; —N═N—, —C (═O) O— Or —CH═N— is more preferred. L 2 is preferably —N═N—, —C (═O) O—, —OC (═O) —, —CH═N—, or —CH═CH—; —N═N—, —C (═O) O— or —CH═N— is more preferred. However, L 1 and L 2 are not both azo groups.
Preferred examples of the combination of L 1 and L 2 include (L 1 / L 2 ) = (— N═N — / — C (═O) O—), (—N═N — / — CH═N—). ), (—N═N — / — CH═CH—), (—C (═O) O — / — N═N—), (—C (═O) O — / — CH═CH—), And (—CH═N — / — N═N—); (L 1 / L 2 ) = (— N═N — / — CH═N—), and (—C (═O) O— / -N = N-) is more preferable.
 前記一般式(I)で表される化合物の例には、下記一般式(II)で表される化合物が含まれる。 Examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I) include a compound represented by the following general formula (II).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式中、L11及びL12はそれぞれ、アゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し、但し、L11とL12が共にアゾ基になることはなく;R11~R15はそれぞれ、水素原子もしくは置換基を表し、R11とR13は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A1は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。 Wherein, L 11 and L 12 are each, azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group, provided that never L 11 and L 12 is an azo group together; R 11 ~ R 15 each Represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 11 and R 13 may form a ring with each other; A 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
 一般式(II)中、R11及びR12は、水素原子、又は置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~12、特に好ましくは炭素数1~8のアルキル基であり、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、tert-ブチル基、n-オクチル基、n-デシル基、n-ヘキサデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基などが挙げられる)が好ましい。
 R13は、上記一般式(I)のAr2の好ましい置換基と同様であり、R11と互いに環を形成していてもよく、窒素原子を含んだ5員環及び6員環が好ましい。
 R14及びR15はそれぞれ、上記一般式(I)のAr2及びAr3の好ましい置換基と同様である。
In the general formula (II), R 11 and R 12 are each a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably An alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, n-octyl group, n-decyl group, n-hexadecyl group , A cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and the like.
R 13 is the same as the preferable substituent of Ar 2 in the general formula (I), and may form a ring with R 11, and a 5-membered ring and a 6-membered ring containing a nitrogen atom are preferable.
R 14 and R 15 are respectively the same as the preferred substituents for Ar 2 and Ar 3 in the general formula (I).
 一般式(II)中、L11及びL12の好ましい例、並びにその組合わせの好ましい例については、上記一般式(I)中のL1及びL2の好ましい例、並びにその組合わせの好ましい例と同様である。 In the general formula (II), preferred examples of L 11 and L 12 and preferred examples of the combination thereof are preferred examples of L 1 and L 2 in the general formula (I) and preferred examples of the combination thereof. It is the same.
 また、前記一般式(I)で表される化合物の例には、下記一般式(III)及び(IV)で表される化合物が含まれる。下記一般式(III)で表される化合物は、イエロー色素として、また、下記一般式(IV)で表される化合物は、マゼンタ色素として、それぞれ利用されるであろう。 Further, examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I) include compounds represented by the following general formulas (III) and (IV). A compound represented by the following general formula (III) will be used as a yellow dye, and a compound represented by the following general formula (IV) will be used as a magenta dye.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 式中、L21はエステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;L22はアゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R21~R25はそれぞれ、水素原子又は置換基を表し、R21とR23は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A2は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。 In the formula, L 21 represents an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; L 22 represents an azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 21 to R 25 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. R 21 and R 23 may form a ring with each other; A 2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
 一般式(III)中、A2は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、もしくは窒素原子を表し、A2が炭素原子を表すときの置換基としては、一般式(I)中のAr4の好ましい置換基と同様である。
 一般式(III)中、L21及びL22の好ましい例、並びにその組合わせの好ましい例については、上記一般式(I)中のL1及びL2の好ましい例、並びにその組合わせの好ましい例と同様である。
 式(III)の化合物では、L21はアゾ基にはなり得ない。L21をアゾ基以外とすることで、色素の吸収極大波長を短波長化することができる。L22がアゾ基であっても、その効果は同様である。
In the general formula (III), A 2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, and as a substituent when A 2 represents a carbon atom, preferred substitution of Ar 4 in the general formula (I) Same as the group.
In the general formula (III), preferred examples of L 21 and L 22 and preferred examples of the combination thereof are preferred examples of L 1 and L 2 in the general formula (I) and preferred examples of the combination thereof. It is the same.
In the compound of formula (III), L 21 cannot be an azo group. By making L 21 other than an azo group, the absorption maximum wavelength of the dye can be shortened. Even if L 22 is an azo group, the effect is the same.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
式中、L31はイミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R31~R35はそれぞれ水素原子もしくは置換基を表し、R31とR33は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A3は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。 Represents wherein, L 31 is an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 31 ~ R 35 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 31 and R 33 may form a mutually ring; A 3 is a substituted Alternatively, it represents an unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
 一般式(IV)中、R31~R35の好ましい範囲は、それぞれ一般式(II)中のR11~R15と同様である。R34が下記の位置に存在し、C15のアルキル基であると、溶解性が向上するので好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 また、一般式(IV)中、L31はイミノ基(-CH=N-もしくは-N=CH-)、又はビニレン基(-CH=CH-)を表し、ビニレン基(-CH=N-)が好ましい。L31がイミノ基又はビニレン基であることにより、二色比がより高くなる。具体的には、例えば、L31がエステル基である化合物と比較して、二色比がより高くなる。
 一般式(IV)中、A3は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、もしくは窒素原子を表し、A3が炭素原子を表すときの置換基としては、一般式(I)中のAr4の好ましい置換基と同様である。
In general formula (IV), the preferred ranges of R 31 to R 35 are the same as R 11 to R 15 in general formula (II), respectively. R 34 is located at a position below and is an alkyl group of C 1 ~ 5, the solubility is improved, which is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
In the general formula (IV), L 31 represents an imino group (—CH═N— or —N═CH—) or a vinylene group (—CH═CH—), and a vinylene group (—CH═N—) Is preferred. When L 31 is an imino group or vinylene group, the dichroic ratio becomes higher. Specifically, for example, the dichroic ratio is higher than that of a compound in which L 31 is an ester group.
In the general formula (IV), A 3 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. As the substituent when A 3 represents a carbon atom, preferred substitution of Ar 4 in the general formula (I) Same as the group.
 前記一般式(II)~(IV)中、R11、R12、R21、R22、R31及びR32がそれぞれ、炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基であり;R13、R23及びR33がそれぞれ、水素原子であり;R14、R24、R34、R15、R25及びR35がそれぞれ、水素原子、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素原子数1~6の、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基であり;A1、A2及びA3が窒素原子、又は炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい、炭素原子数1~6のアルコキシ基、シアノ基、又は置換アミノ基で置換された炭素原子であるのが好ましい。
 R11、R12、R21、R22、R31及びR32がそれぞれ、炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基である場合、アルキル基の置換基の例には、重合性基が含まれ、例えば、アクリロイル基、及びメタクリロイル基が含まれる。
 また、A1、A2及びA3が置換アミノ基で置換された炭素原子である場合、アミノ基の置換基の例には、炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基が含まれ、アルキル基の置換基の例には、重合性基が含まれ、例えば、アクリロイル基、及びメタクリロイル基が含まれる。
In the general formulas (II) to (IV), R 11 , R 12 , R 21 , R 22 , R 31 and R 32 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; 13 , R 23 and R 33 are each a hydrogen atom; R 14 , R 24 , R 34 , R 15 , R 25 and R 35 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or carbon An alkoxy group having 1 to 6 atoms which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms; A 1 , A 2 and A 3 are nitrogen atoms, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; A carbon atom substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group, which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms is preferable.
When R 11 , R 12 , R 21 , R 22 , R 31 and R 32 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, examples of the substituent of the alkyl group include polymerizable Groups, for example, acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups.
When A 1 , A 2 and A 3 are carbon atoms substituted with a substituted amino group, examples of the amino group substituent include substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group include a polymerizable group, for example, an acryloyl group and a methacryloyl group.
 以下に、本発明に利用可能な前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素の例を示したが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Examples of the dichroic dye represented by the general formula (I) that can be used in the present invention are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 前記一般式(I)~(IV)で表される化合物の製造方法については特に制限はない。例えば、Journal  of  Materials Chemistry(1999),9(11),2755-2763等に記載の方法に準じて容易に合成することができる。
 式(IV)の化合物であって、L31がイミノ基である化合物の製造方法の一例は、以下の通りである。
There is no particular limitation on the method for producing the compounds represented by the general formulas (I) to (IV). For example, it can be easily synthesized according to the method described in Journal of Materials Chemistry (1999), 9 (11), 2755-2863.
An example of a method for producing a compound of the formula (IV) wherein L 31 is an imino group is as follows.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 また、前記式(IV)の化合物であって、式中のL31がエステル基である化合物の製造方法の一例は以下の通りである。 An example of the method for producing the compound of the formula (IV), wherein L 31 in the formula is an ester group, is as follows.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 上記2反応式中、Rは置換基を表す。
 原料として、R31~R35が水素原子又は種々の置換基である化合物を利用することで、式(IV)で表される種々の化合物を製造することができる。
 さらに、下記の式(III)の化合物の製造例を参照することで、A3が窒素原子である化合物も同様に製造することができる。
In the above two reaction formulas, R represents a substituent.
By using compounds in which R 31 to R 35 are hydrogen atoms or various substituents as raw materials, various compounds represented by the formula (IV) can be produced.
Furthermore, by referring to the following production example of the compound of formula (III), a compound in which A 3 is a nitrogen atom can be produced in the same manner.
 また、前記式(III)の化合物の製造方法であって、A2が窒素原子である化合物の製造方法の一例は、以下の通りである。 An example of the method for producing the compound of the formula (III), wherein A 2 is a nitrogen atom, is as follows.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 原料として、R21~R25が水素原子又は種々の置換基である化合物を利用することで、式(III)で表される種々の化合物を製造することができる。
 また、上記製造方法では、L21がエステル基である化合物を製造しているが、原料として用いた4-アミノ安息香酸及びクレゾールをそれぞれ、4-アミノベンゾアルデヒド及びトルイジンにそれぞれ代えることで、L21がイミノ基である化合物も同様に製造することができる。
 さらに、上記式(IV)の化合物の製造例を参照することで、A2が置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子である化合物も同様に製造することができる。
By using compounds in which R 21 to R 25 are hydrogen atoms or various substituents as raw materials, various compounds represented by the formula (III) can be produced.
In the above production method, a compound in which L 21 is an ester group is produced. By replacing 4-aminobenzoic acid and cresol used as raw materials with 4-aminobenzaldehyde and toluidine, respectively, A compound in which 21 is an imino group can be similarly produced.
Furthermore, by referring to the production examples of the compound of the formula (IV), a compound in which A 2 is a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom can be produced in the same manner.
 本発明に用いる前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素は、液晶性を示す。ネマチック液晶相を示すのが好ましく、好ましくは温度10~300℃、より好ましくは温度100~250℃でネマチック液晶相を示す化合物である。 The dichroic dye represented by the general formula (I) used in the present invention exhibits liquid crystallinity. The compound preferably exhibits a nematic liquid crystal phase, preferably a compound exhibiting a nematic liquid crystal phase at a temperature of 10 to 300 ° C., more preferably at a temperature of 100 to 250 ° C.
 本発明の組成物において、前記一般式(I)で表される1種以上の二色性色素の含有量については特に制限はない。用途に応じて、好ましい範囲が決定されるであろう。偏光膜等、高い吸収異方性が必要となる膜の形成に利用される態様では、前記一般式(I)で表される1種以上の二色性色素は、当該組成物中に含まれる全色素の総質量に対して、10~90質量%であることが好ましく、30~80質量%であることが特に好ましい。また、溶剤を除く全固形分における前記一般式(I)で表される1種以上の二色性色素の含有量は、20質量%以上であることが好ましく、30質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。
 また、上記組成物を溶液として調製する態様では、全固形分の濃度は、0.1~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.5~5質量%であることが特に好ましい。
In the composition of the present invention, the content of the one or more dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) is not particularly limited. Depending on the application, the preferred range will be determined. In an embodiment used for forming a film that requires high absorption anisotropy such as a polarizing film, one or more dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) are included in the composition. It is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, particularly preferably 30 to 80% by mass, based on the total mass of all the dyes. The content of the one or more dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) in the total solid content excluding the solvent is preferably 20% by mass or more, and preferably 30% by mass or more. Particularly preferred.
In the embodiment in which the composition is prepared as a solution, the concentration of the total solid content is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.5 to 5% by mass.
1.-2 添加剤
 本発明の二色性色素組成物は、前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素の1種以上とともに、1種以上の添加剤を含有していてもよい。但し、色素等の着色材料以外の材料として、液晶性化合物(低分子液晶性化合物及び高分子液晶性化合物)を実質的に含有しないのが好ましい。本発明の二色性色素組成物は、ホストとして液晶材料を含み、且つゲストとして二色性色素を含み、二色性色素を液晶材料の配向に付随して配向させる態様として使用されるのではなく、二色性色素を、その液晶性によって配向させる態様として使用されるのが好ましい。GHタイプと比較して、より高い二色比を達成できる点で好ましい。GHタイプの偏光子では、形成に用いる組成物は、通常、ホストとなる液晶化合物を、全固形分中80質量%以上含有し、ゲストの色素の含有量は5~15質量%程度である。本発明の好ましい態様は、液晶性の非着色材料を実質的に含有しない非GHの態様であり、具体的には、前記組成物中の液晶性の非着色材料の占める割合は30質量%以下である態様が好ましく、より好ましくは20質量%以下であり、さらに好ましくは10質量%以下であり、よりさらに好ましくは5質量%以下である。液晶性の非着色材料を全く含有しないのが特に好ましい。
1. -2 Additive The dichroic dye composition of the present invention may contain one or more additives together with one or more dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I). However, it is preferable that substantially no liquid crystalline compounds (low molecular liquid crystalline compounds and high molecular liquid crystalline compounds) are contained as materials other than coloring materials such as pigments. The dichroic dye composition of the present invention includes a liquid crystal material as a host and a dichroic dye as a guest, and is used as an aspect in which the dichroic dye is aligned with the alignment of the liquid crystal material. However, it is preferable to use the dichroic dye as an embodiment in which the dichroic dye is aligned by its liquid crystallinity. Compared with the GH type, it is preferable in that a higher dichroic ratio can be achieved. In the case of a GH type polarizer, the composition used for formation usually contains 80% by mass or more of a liquid crystal compound as a host in the total solid content, and the content of the guest dye is about 5 to 15% by mass. A preferred embodiment of the present invention is a non-GH embodiment that does not substantially contain a liquid crystalline non-colored material. Specifically, the proportion of the liquid crystalline non-colored material in the composition is 30% by mass or less. The aspect which is is preferable, More preferably, it is 20 mass% or less, More preferably, it is 10 mass% or less, More preferably, it is 5 mass% or less. It is particularly preferable that no liquid crystalline non-colored material is contained.
 以下、本発明の二色性色素組成物に使用可能な、種々の添加剤について説明する。
ラジカル重合性基を有する非液晶性多官能モノマー;
 本発明の組成物は、ラジカル重合性基を有する非液晶性の多官能モノマーを含有することが好ましい。
 本発明における、ラジカル重合性基を有する非液晶性の多官能モノマーとは、成長活性種がラジカル的に重合反応する多官能モノマーをいう。この多官能モノマーは分子内に2個以上の二重結合を有する多官能モノマーであることが好ましく、エチレン性(脂肪族性)不飽和二重結合であることが特に好ましく、具体的には、アルケン、ジエン、アクリレート、メタクリレート、不飽和多価カルボン酸のジエステル、α、β-不飽和カルボン酸のアミド、不飽和ニトリル、スチレン及びその誘導体、ビニルエステル、ビニルエーテル等の官能基を有する多官能モノマーを挙げることができる。分子内の二重結合の数は、2~20であることが好ましく、2~15であることがさらに好ましく、2~6であることが最も好ましい。多官能モノマーは、分子内に2個以上のヒドロキシルを有するポリオールと、不飽和脂肪酸とのエステルであることが好ましい。不飽和脂肪酸の例には、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、マレイン酸及びイタコン酸が含まれ、アクリル酸及びメタクリル酸が好ましい。分子内に4個以上のヒドロキシルを有するポリオールは、四価以上のアルコールであるか、あるいは三価以上のアルコールのオリゴマーであることが好ましい。オリゴマーは、エーテル結合、エステル結合又はウレタン結合により多価アルコールを連結した分子構造を有する。多価アルコールをエーテル結合で連結した分子構造を有するオリゴマーが好ましい。
 上記の多官能モノマーは、有機溶媒に可溶であるものが特に好ましい。
 そのようなモノマーとしては、沸点が常圧で100度以上の化合物を挙げることができる。
Hereinafter, various additives that can be used in the dichroic dye composition of the present invention will be described.
A non-liquid crystalline polyfunctional monomer having a radical polymerizable group;
The composition of the present invention preferably contains a non-liquid crystalline polyfunctional monomer having a radical polymerizable group.
In the present invention, the non-liquid crystalline polyfunctional monomer having a radical polymerizable group refers to a polyfunctional monomer in which a growth active species undergoes a radical polymerization reaction. This polyfunctional monomer is preferably a polyfunctional monomer having two or more double bonds in the molecule, particularly preferably an ethylenic (aliphatic) unsaturated double bond, specifically, Polyfunctional monomers having functional groups such as alkenes, dienes, acrylates, methacrylates, diesters of unsaturated polycarboxylic acids, amides of α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acids, unsaturated nitriles, styrene and derivatives thereof, vinyl esters, vinyl ethers, etc. Can be mentioned. The number of double bonds in the molecule is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 15, and most preferably 2 to 6. The polyfunctional monomer is preferably an ester of a polyol having two or more hydroxyl groups in the molecule and an unsaturated fatty acid. Examples of unsaturated fatty acids include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, maleic acid and itaconic acid, with acrylic acid and methacrylic acid being preferred. The polyol having 4 or more hydroxyl groups in the molecule is preferably a tetrahydric or higher alcohol or a trihydric or higher alcohol oligomer. The oligomer has a molecular structure in which polyhydric alcohols are linked by an ether bond, an ester bond or a urethane bond. Oligomers having a molecular structure in which polyhydric alcohols are linked by ether bonds are preferred.
The polyfunctional monomer is particularly preferably soluble in an organic solvent.
An example of such a monomer is a compound having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher at normal pressure.
 上記の多官能モノマーのうち、2官能(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えばエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ビスフェノキシエタノールフルオレンジアクリレートなどが挙げられ、その市販品としては、例えばアロニックスM-210、同M-240、同M-6200(東亜合成化学工業(株)製)、KAYARAD HDDA、同HX-220、同R-604(日本化薬(株)製)、ビスコート260、同312、同335HP(大阪有機化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Among the polyfunctional monomers described above, examples of the bifunctional (meth) acrylate include ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, Polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, tetraethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, bisphenoxyethanol full orange acrylate and the like are listed, and commercially available products thereof include, for example, Aronix M-210, M-240, M-6200 (Toa Synthetic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD HDDA, HX-220, R-604 (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Biscote 260, 312 and 335HP (Osaka Organic Chemical Co., Ltd.), etc. Is mentioned.
 3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えばトリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリ((メタ)アクリロイロキシエチル)フォスフェート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられ、その市販品としては、例えばアロニックスM-309、同M-400、同M-405、同M-450、同M-7100、同M-8030、同M-8060(いずれも商品名、東亜合成化学工業(株)製)、KAYARAD TMPTA、同DPHA、同DPCA-20、同DPCA-30、同DPCA-60、同DPCA-120(いずれも商品名、日本化薬(株)製)、ビスコート295、同300、同360、同GPT、同3PA、同400(いずれも商品名、大阪有機化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylate include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, tri ((meth) acryloyloxyethyl) phosphate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, Examples thereof include dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate and dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, and examples of commercially available products thereof include Aronix M-309, M-400, M-405, M-450, and the like. M-7100, M-8030, M-8060 (all trade names, manufactured by Toa Gosei Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD TMPTA, DPHA, DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, DPCA-120 (both Product name, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), BISCOAT 295, the 300, the 360, the same GPT, the same 3PA, the 400 (trade name, manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and the like.
 さらなるモノマー及びオリゴマーの例として、2官能又は3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えばポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンジアクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(アクリロイルオキシプロピル)エーテル、トリ(アクリロイルオキシエチル)イソシアヌレート、トリ(アクリロイルオキシエチル)シアヌレート、グリセリントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリ((メタ)アクリロイロキシエチル)フォスフェート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート;トリメチロールプロパンやグリセリン等の多官能アルコールにエチレンオキシド又はプロピレンオキシドを付加した後(メタ)アクリレート化したもの等の多官能アクリレートや多官能メタクリレート;ポリエーテル系ポリオールのポリ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエステル系ポリオールのポリ(メタ)アクリレート及びポリウレタン系ポリオールのポリ(メタ)アクリレートが含まれる。 As examples of further monomers and oligomers, bifunctional or trifunctional or higher (meth) acrylates include, for example, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane diacrylate. , Neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, tri (acryloyl) Oxyethyl) cyanurate, glycerin tri (meth) acrylate, tri ((meth) acryloyloxyethyl) phosphate, dipen Erythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate; polyfunctional acrylates and polyfunctionals such as those obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to polyfunctional alcohols such as trimethylolpropane and glycerin and then (meth) acrylated Methacrylate; Poly (meth) acrylate of polyether-based polyol, poly (meth) acrylate of polyester-based polyol, and poly (meth) acrylate of polyurethane-based polyol.
 ポリオールとアクリル酸とのエステルからなるモノマーは、三菱レーヨン(株)(商品名:ダイヤビームUK-4154)や日本化薬(株)(商品名:KYARAD・DPHA、SR355)から市販されている。 Monomers composed of an ester of polyol and acrylic acid are commercially available from Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. (trade name: Diabeam UK-4154) and Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. (trade name: KYARAD / DPHA, SR355).
 これらの2官能又は3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレートは、単独であるいは組み合わせて用いられ、単官能(メタ)アクリレートと組み合わせて用いられてもよい。 These bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylates may be used alone or in combination, and may be used in combination with monofunctional (meth) acrylate.
 単官能の(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、カルビトール(メタ)アクリレート、イソボロニル(メタ)アクリレート、3-メトキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル-2-ヒドロキシプロピルフタレート、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチレングリコール(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられ、その市販品としては、例えばアロニックスM-101、同M-111、同M-114(東亜合成化学工業(株)製)、KAYARAD TC-110S、同TC-120S(日本化薬(株)製)、ビスコート158、同2311(大阪有機化学工業(株)製)が挙げられる。 Examples of monofunctional (meth) acrylates include 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, carbitol (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, 3-methoxybutyl (meth) acrylate, and 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl. -2-Hydroxypropyl phthalate, polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, ethylene glycol (meth) acrylate, and the like. -101, M-111, M-114 (manufactured by Toa Gosei Chemical Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD TC-110S, TC-120S (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Biscote 158, 2311 (large) Made Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 後述するように、偏光子を作成する際には、ネマチック液晶性色素の配向状態を固定するのが好ましく、固定する手段としては、重合反応を利用して色素の配向を固定する。重合反応には、熱重合開始剤を用いる熱重合反応と光重合開始剤を用いる光重合反応とが含まれる。 As will be described later, when preparing a polarizer, it is preferable to fix the alignment state of the nematic liquid crystalline dye, and as a means for fixing, the alignment of the dye is fixed using a polymerization reaction. The polymerization reaction includes a thermal polymerization reaction using a thermal polymerization initiator and a photopolymerization reaction using a photopolymerization initiator.
 本発明の組成物中、溶剤を除く全固形分における色素と非液晶性の重合性多官能モノマーの総含有量は50質量%以上が好ましく、70質量%以上が特に好ましい。 In the composition of the present invention, the total content of the pigment and the non-liquid crystalline polymerizable polyfunctional monomer in the total solid content excluding the solvent is preferably 50% by mass or more, particularly preferably 70% by mass or more.
重合開始剤:
 上記ラジカル重合性多官能モノマーを含有する組成物を硬化反応させるために、本発明の組成物は、重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。
 重合開始剤としては、光重合、熱重合に応じて、公知のものを好適に使用することができ、たとえば光重合開始剤の例には、α-カルボニル化合物(米国特許2367661号、同2367670号の各明細書記載)、アシロインエーテル(米国特許2448828号明細書記載)、α-炭化水素置換芳香族アシロイン化合物(米国特許2722512号明細書記載)、多核キノン化合物(米国特許3046127号、同2951758号の各明細書記載)、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマーとp-アミノフェニルケトンとの組み合わせ(米国特許3549367号明細書記載)、アクリジン及びフェナジン化合物(特開昭60-105667号公報、米国特許4239850号明細書記載)及びオキサジアゾル化合物(米国特許4212970号明細書記載)が含まれる。
Polymerization initiator:
In order to cure the composition containing the radical polymerizable polyfunctional monomer, the composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization initiator.
As the polymerization initiator, known ones can be suitably used according to photopolymerization and thermal polymerization. For example, α-carbonyl compounds (US Pat. Nos. 2,367,661 and 2,367,670) can be used as examples of the photopolymerization initiator. ), Acyloin ether (described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,448,828), α-hydrocarbon-substituted aromatic acyloin compound (described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,722,512), polynuclear quinone compound (U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,046,127 and 2,951,758). No. 3), a combination of a triarylimidazole dimer and p-aminophenyl ketone (described in US Pat. No. 3,549,367), an acridine compound and a phenazine compound (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 60-105667, US Pat. No. 4,239,850) Oxadiazole compounds (US Pat. No. 42129) No. 70).
 光重合開始剤の使用量は、溶剤を除く全固形分の0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、1~10質量%であることがさらに好ましい。
 光重合開始剤の例、光重合開始剤の使用量、及び重合のための光照射エネルギーの値の各々は特開2001-91741号広報の段落[0050]~[0051]の記載も本発明に適用できる。
The amount of the photopolymerization initiator used is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content excluding the solvent.
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator, the amount of the photopolymerization initiator used, and the value of the light irradiation energy for the polymerization are described in paragraphs [0050] to [0051] of JP 2001-91741 A. Applicable.
 本発明の組成物には、前記の色素及び非液晶性の多官能モノマー、重合開始剤の他に有機溶媒や、任意の添加剤を配合・併用することができる。添加剤の例としては、風ムラ防止剤、ハジキ防止剤、配向膜のチルト角(光吸収異方性膜/配向膜界面での液晶性色素の傾斜角)を制御するための添加剤、空気界面のチルト角(偏光子膜/空気界面での色素の傾斜角)を制御するための添加剤、糖類、防黴、抗菌及び殺菌の少なくともいずれかの機能を有する薬剤、非液晶性のバインダーポリマー等である。以下、各添加剤について説明する。 In the composition of the present invention, an organic solvent or an arbitrary additive can be blended and used in addition to the above-mentioned pigment, non-liquid crystalline polyfunctional monomer, and polymerization initiator. Examples of the additive include an anti-wind unevenness agent, an anti-repellency agent, an additive for controlling the tilt angle of the alignment film (the tilt angle of the liquid crystalline dye at the light absorption anisotropic film / alignment film interface), air Additives for controlling the tilt angle of the interface (the tilt angle of the dye at the polarizer film / air interface), saccharides, agents having at least one of antifungal, antibacterial and antibacterial functions, non-liquid crystalline binder polymers Etc. Hereinafter, each additive will be described.
風ムラ防止剤:
 本発明の組成物を塗布液として調製し、表面に塗布した膜を形成する場合には、組成物中には、塗布時の風ムラを防止するための材料、風ムラ防止剤、を添加してもよい。風ムラ防止剤としては、一般的に、フッ素系ポリマーが使用される。使用するフッ素系ポリマーとしては、色素のチルト角変化や配向を著しく阻害しない限り、特に制限はない。風ムラ防止剤として使用可能なフッ素ポリマーの例としては、特開2004-198511号公報、特許第4190275号、特開2004-333852号公報、特開2005-206638号公報に記載がある。色素とフッ素系ポリマーとを併用することによって、ムラを生じることなく表示品位の高い画像を表示することができる。さらに、ハジキなどの塗布性も改善される。液晶性色素の配向を阻害しないように、風ムラ防止目的で使用されるフッ素系ポリマーの添加量は、液晶性色素に対して一般に0.1~10質量%の範囲であるのが好ましく、0.5~10質量%の範囲にあるのがより好ましく、0.5~5質量%の範囲にあるのがさらに好ましい。
Wind unevenness prevention agent:
When the composition of the present invention is prepared as a coating solution to form a film coated on the surface, a material for preventing wind unevenness during coating, an anti-wind uneven agent, is added to the composition. May be. Generally, a fluorine-based polymer is used as the wind unevenness preventing agent. There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a fluorine-type polymer to be used unless the tilt angle change and orientation of a pigment | dye are inhibited significantly. Examples of fluoropolymers that can be used as wind unevenness inhibitors are described in JP-A No. 2004-198511, JP-A No. 4190275, JP-A No. 2004-333852, and JP-A No. 2005-206638. By using the pigment and the fluorine-based polymer in combination, an image with high display quality can be displayed without causing unevenness. Furthermore, applicability such as repelling is improved. In order not to disturb the alignment of the liquid crystalline dye, the amount of the fluorine-based polymer used for the purpose of preventing wind unevenness is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 10% by mass with respect to the liquid crystalline dye. More preferably, it is in the range of 5 to 10% by mass, and still more preferably in the range of 0.5 to 5% by mass.
ハジキ防止剤:
 本発明の組成物を塗布液として調製し、表面に塗布した膜を形成する場合には、組成物中に、塗布時のハジキを防止するための材料、ハジキ防止剤、を添加してもよい。ハジキ防止剤としては、一般的に、ポリマーが使用される。使用するポリマーとしては、当該液晶性色素と相溶性を有し、色素のチルト角変化や配向を著しく阻害しない限り、特に制限はない。ハジキ防止剤として使用可能なポリマーの例としては、特開平8-95030号公報に記載があり、特に好ましい具体的ポリマー例としてはセルロースエステル類を挙げることができる。セルロースエステルの例としては、セルロースアセテート、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース及びセルロースアセテートブチレートを挙げることができる。色素の配向を阻害しないように、ハジキ防止目的で使用されるポリマーの添加量は、液晶性色素に対して一般に0.1~10質量%の範囲であるのが好ましく、0.1~8質量%の範囲にあるのがより好ましく、0.1~5質量%の範囲にあるのがさらに好ましい。
Anti-repellent agent:
When the composition of the present invention is prepared as a coating solution to form a film coated on the surface, a material for preventing repelling during coating, a repelling agent, may be added to the composition. . Generally, a polymer is used as the repellency inhibitor. The polymer to be used is not particularly limited as long as it is compatible with the liquid crystalline dye and does not significantly inhibit the change in the tilt angle or orientation of the dye. Examples of polymers that can be used as repellency inhibitors are described in JP-A-8-95030, and specific examples of particularly preferred polymers include cellulose esters. Examples of cellulose esters include cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate propionate, hydroxypropyl cellulose, and cellulose acetate butyrate. In order not to inhibit the orientation of the dye, the amount of the polymer used for the purpose of preventing repellency is generally preferably in the range of 0.1 to 10% by weight, preferably 0.1 to 8% by weight with respect to the liquid crystalline dye. % Is more preferable, and a range of 0.1 to 5% by mass is even more preferable.
配向膜チルト角制御剤:
 本発明の組成物には、配向膜のチルト角を制御する添加剤、配向膜チルト角制御剤、を添加するのが好ましい。配向膜チルト角制御剤の例には、分子内に極性基と非極性基の両方を有する化合物が含まれる。分子内に極性基と非極性基の両方を有する化合物の例には、R0-OH、R0-COOH、R0-O-R0、R0-NH2、R0-NH-R0、R0-SH、R0-S-R0、R0-CO-R0、R0-COO-R0、R0-CONH-R0、R0-CONHCO-R0、R0-SO3H、R0-SO3-R0、R0-SO2NH-R0、R0-SO2NHSO2-R0、R0-C=N-R0、HO-P(-OR02、(HO-)2PO-OR0、P(-OR03、HO-PO(-OR02、(HO-)2PO-OR0、PO(-OR03、R0-NO2及びR0-CNならびにこれらの有機塩が含まれる。なお、式中、R0は非極性基であり、R0が複数ある場合は、それぞれのR0は同一でも異なっていてもよい。る。ここで、有機塩としては、上記化合物の有機塩(例えば、アンモニウム塩、カルボン酸塩、スルホン酸塩等)の他、ピリジニウム塩等も好ましく採用することができる。前記分子内に極性基と非極性基の両方を有する化合物の中でも、R0-OH、R0-COOH、R0-O-R0、R0-NH2、R0-SO3H、HO-PO(-OR02、(HO-)2PO-OR0、PO(-OR03もしくはこれらの有機塩が好ましい。
Alignment film tilt angle control agent:
It is preferable to add an additive for controlling the tilt angle of the alignment film and an alignment film tilt angle control agent to the composition of the present invention. Examples of the alignment film tilt angle control agent include compounds having both a polar group and a nonpolar group in the molecule. Examples of compounds having both polar and nonpolar groups in the molecule include R 0 —OH, R 0 —COOH, R 0 —O—R 0 , R 0 —NH 2 , R 0 —NH—R 0. , R 0 —SH, R 0 —S—R 0 , R 0 —CO—R 0 , R 0 —COO—R 0 , R 0 —CONH—R 0 , R 0 —CONHCO—R 0 , R 0 —SO 3 H, R 0 —SO 3 —R 0 , R 0 —SO 2 NH—R 0 , R 0 —SO 2 NHSO 2 —R 0 , R 0 —C═N—R 0 , HO—P (—OR 0 ) 2 , (HO—) 2 PO—OR 0 , P (—OR 0 ) 3 , HO—PO (—OR 0 ) 2 , (HO—) 2 PO—OR 0 , PO (—OR 0 ) 3 , R 0- NO 2 and R 0 -CN and their organic salts are included. In the formulas, R 0 is a non-polar group, if R 0 is plural, each R 0 is may be the same or different. The Here, as the organic salt, in addition to the organic salt of the above compound (for example, ammonium salt, carboxylate, sulfonate, etc.), pyridinium salt and the like can be preferably employed. Among the compounds having both polar groups and nonpolar groups in the molecule, R 0 —OH, R 0 —COOH, R 0 —O—R 0 , R 0 —NH 2 , R 0 —SO 3 H, HO —PO (—OR 0 ) 2 , (HO—) 2 PO—OR 0 , PO (—OR 0 ) 3 or an organic salt thereof is preferred.
 非極性基ROとしては、例えば、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30の直鎖、分岐、環状の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基)、アルケニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30の直鎖、分岐、環状の置換もしくは無置換のアルケニル基)、アルキニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30の直鎖、分岐、環状の置換もしくは無置換のアルケニル基)、アリール基(好ましくは、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリール基)、シリル基(好ましくは、炭素数3~30の置換もしくは無置換のシリル基)が例として挙げられる。これらの非極性基はさらに置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基(シクロアルキル基、ビシクロアルキル基を含む)、アルケニル基(シクロアルケニル基、ビシクロアルケニル基を含む)、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基、ヒドロキシル基、ニトロ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、シリルオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基、アリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基、アミノ基(アニリノ基を含む)、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルスルホニルアミノ基、アリールスルホニルアミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、スルファモイル基、スルホ基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールアゾ基、ヘテロ環アゾ基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基等が好ましい例として挙げられる。 Examples of the nonpolar group R 2 O include an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched, or cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms) and an alkenyl group (preferably a linear chain having 1 to 30 carbon atoms). Branched, cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl groups), alkynyl groups (preferably linear, branched, cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), aryl groups (preferably having 6 carbon atoms). Examples thereof include ˜30 substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups) and silyl groups (preferably substituted or unsubstituted silyl groups having 3 to 30 carbon atoms). These nonpolar groups may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group (including a cycloalkyl group and a bicycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group (a cycloalkenyl group and a bicycloalkenyl group). Alkynyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, cyano group, hydroxyl group, nitro group, carboxyl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, silyloxy group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, alkoxycarbonyloxy Group, aryloxycarbonyloxy group, amino group (including anilino group), acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkylsulfonylamino group, arylsulfonyl Mino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl group, sulfo group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group Preferred examples include carbamoyl group, arylazo group, heterocyclic azo group, imide group, phosphino group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, silyl group and the like.
 本発明の組成物中に前記配向膜チルト制御剤を添加し、配向膜チルト制御剤の存在下で前記二色性色素の分子を配向させることで、配向膜側界面における色素分子のチルト角を調整することができる。配向膜チルト角制御剤の添加量は、一般的には、前記二色性色素の質量に対して0.0001質量%~30質量%であるのが好ましく、0.001質量%~20質量%であるのがより好ましく、0.005質量%~10質量%であるのがさらに好ましい。本発明では、特開2006-58801号公報に記載の配向膜チルト制御剤を使用することができる。 By adding the alignment film tilt control agent to the composition of the present invention and orienting the molecules of the dichroic dye in the presence of the alignment film tilt control agent, the tilt angle of the dye molecules at the alignment film side interface can be reduced. Can be adjusted. In general, the addition amount of the alignment film tilt angle control agent is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 30% by mass, and preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the mass of the dichroic dye. More preferably, it is 0.005 to 10% by mass. In the present invention, the alignment film tilt control agent described in JP-A-2006-58801 can be used.
空気界面チルト角制御剤:
 本発明の組成物には、空気界面のチルト角を制御する添加剤、空気界面チルト角制御剤、を添加するのが好ましい。空気界面チルト角制御剤の一例は、水平配向剤である。水平配向剤としては、好ましくは、
(1)下記一般式(10)で表されるフルオロ脂肪族基含有化合物;又は、
(2)一般式(11)もしくは一般式(12)で表されるフルオロ脂肪族基含有モノマーの重合単位及び一般式(13)で表されるアミド基含有モノマーの重合単位からなる群から選択される少なくとも一種の重合単位を含むポリマー;
である。
 まず、(1)下記一般式(10)で表されるフルオロ脂肪族基含有化合物について説明する。
Air interface tilt angle control agent:
It is preferable to add an additive for controlling the tilt angle at the air interface and an air interface tilt angle control agent to the composition of the present invention. An example of the air interface tilt angle control agent is a horizontal alignment agent. As the horizontal alignment agent,
(1) a fluoroaliphatic group-containing compound represented by the following general formula (10); or
(2) selected from the group consisting of polymerized units of fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomers represented by general formula (11) or general formula (12) and polymerized units of amide group-containing monomers represented by general formula (13) A polymer comprising at least one polymerized unit;
It is.
First, (1) the fluoroaliphatic group-containing compound represented by the following general formula (10) will be described.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 式中、R51、R52及びR53は各々独立に、末端にCF3基又はCF2H基を有するアルコキシ基を表し、X11、X22及びX33は各々独立に、-NH-、-O-又は-S-を表し、m11、m22及びm33は各々独立に、1~3の整数を表す。 In the formula, R 51 , R 52 and R 53 each independently represents an alkoxy group having a CF 3 group or a CF 2 H group at the terminal, and X 11 , X 22 and X 33 each independently represent —NH—, Represents —O— or —S—, and m11, m22 and m33 each independently represents an integer of 1 to 3.
 R51、R52及びR53で各々表される置換基は、末端にCF3基又はCF2H基を有するアルコキシ基であり、直鎖状であっても分岐鎖状であってもよく、好ましくは炭素数4~20であり、さらに好ましくは炭素数4~16であり、特に好ましくは6~16である。前記末端にCF3基又はCF2H基を有するアルコキシ基は、アルコキシ基に含まれる水素原子の一部又は全部がフッ素原子で置換されたアルコキシ基である。アルコキシ基中の水素原子の50%以上がフッ素原子で置換されているのが好ましく、60%以上が置換されているのがより好ましく、70%以上を置換されているのが特に好ましい。以下に、R51、R52及びR53で表される末端にCF3基又はCF2H基を有するアルコキシ基の例を示す。 Each of the substituents represented by R 51 , R 52 and R 53 is an alkoxy group having a CF 3 group or a CF 2 H group at the terminal, and may be linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms is preferably 4 to 20, more preferably 4 to 16, and particularly preferably 6 to 16. The alkoxy group having a CF 3 group or a CF 2 H group at the terminal is an alkoxy group in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms contained in the alkoxy group are substituted with fluorine atoms. 50% or more of the hydrogen atoms in the alkoxy group are preferably substituted with fluorine atoms, more preferably 60% or more are substituted, and particularly preferably 70% or more are substituted. Examples of alkoxy groups having a CF 3 group or a CF 2 H group at the ends represented by R 51 , R 52 and R 53 are shown below.
R1:n-C817-O-
R2:n-C613-O-
R3:n-C49-O-
R4:n-C817-(CH22-O-(CH22-O-
R5:n-C613-(CH22-O-(CH22-O-
R6:n-C49-(CH22-O-(CH22-O-
R7:n-C817-(CH23-O-
R8:n-C613-(CH23-O-
R9:n-C49-(CH23-O-
R10:H-(CF28-O-
R11:H-(CF26-O-
R12:H-(CF24-O-
R13:H-(CF28-(CH2)-O-
R14:H-(CF26-(CH2)-O-
R15:H-(CF24-(CH2)-O-
R16:H-(CF28-(CH2)-O-(CH22-O-
R17:H-(CF26-(CH2)-O-(CH22-O-
R18:H-(CF24-(CH2)-O-(CH22-O-
R1: n-C 8 F 17 —O—
R2: n—C 6 F 13 —O—
R3: nC 4 F 9 —O—
R4: nC 8 F 17 — (CH 2 ) 2 —O— (CH 2 ) 2 —O—
R5: nC 6 F 13 — (CH 2 ) 2 —O— (CH 2 ) 2 —O—
R6: nC 4 F 9 — (CH 2 ) 2 —O— (CH 2 ) 2 —O—
R7: nC 8 F 17 — (CH 2 ) 3 —O—
R8: nC 6 F 13 — (CH 2 ) 3 —O—
R9: nC 4 F 9 — (CH 2 ) 3 —O—
R10: H— (CF 2 ) 8 —O—
R11: H— (CF 2 ) 6 —O—
R12: H— (CF 2 ) 4 —O—
R13: H— (CF 2 ) 8 — (CH 2 ) —O—
R14: H— (CF 2 ) 6 — (CH 2 ) —O—
R15: H— (CF 2 ) 4 — (CH 2 ) —O—
R16: H— (CF 2 ) 8 — (CH 2 ) —O— (CH 2 ) 2 —O—
R17: H— (CF 2 ) 6 — (CH 2 ) —O— (CH 2 ) 2 —O—
R18: H— (CF 2 ) 4 — (CH 2 ) —O— (CH 2 ) 2 —O—
 一般式(10)中、X11、X22及びX33はそれぞれ、好ましくは-NH-又は-O-を表し、最も好ましくは-NH-を表す。m11、m22及びm33はそれぞれ、好ましくは2である。 In the general formula (10), X 11 , X 22 and X 33 each preferably represent —NH— or —O—, and most preferably represents —NH—. m 11 , m 22 and m 33 are each preferably 2.
 前記一般式(10)で表される化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明に用いられる化合物はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (10) are shown below, but the compound used in the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 次に、(2)一般式(11)もしくは一般式(12)で表されるフルオロ脂肪族基含有モノマーの重合単位及び一般式(13)で表されるアミド基含有モノマーの重合単位からなる群から選択される少なくとも一種の重合単位を含むポリマーについて説明する。 Next, (2) a group consisting of a polymerization unit of a fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomer represented by general formula (11) or general formula (12) and a polymerization unit of an amide group-containing monomer represented by general formula (13) A polymer containing at least one polymer unit selected from the following will be described.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式中、R61は水素原子、ハロゲン原子又はメチル基を表し、L61は2価の連結基を表し、m1は1以上18以下の整数を表す。 In the formula, R 61 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group, L 61 represents a divalent linking group, and m1 represents an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式中、R62は水素原子、ハロゲン原子又はメチル基を表し、L62は2価の連結基を表し、n1は1以上18以下の整数を表す。 Wherein, R 62 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group, L 62 represents a divalent linking group, n1 represents an integer of 1 to 18.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 式中、R73は水素原子、ハロゲン原子又はメチル基を表し、R71及びR72はそれぞれ独立に水素原子、炭素数1~18のアルキル基、炭素数6~20の芳香族基又は炭素数1~20のヘテロ環基を表す。また、R71とR72は互いに連結して複素環を形成してもよい。 In the formula, R 73 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group, and R 71 and R 72 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms or a carbon number. 1 to 20 heterocyclic groups are represented. R 71 and R 72 may be connected to each other to form a heterocyclic ring.
 前記一般式(11)中、R61は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子又はメチル基を表し、水素原子又はメチル基がより好ましい。L61は2価の連結基を表し、m1は1以上18以下の整数を表し、2~12がより好ましく、4~8が更に好ましく、4又は6であることが最も好ましい。 In the general formula (11), R 61 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. L 61 represents a divalent linking group, m1 represents an integer of 1 to 18, more preferably 2 to 12, still more preferably 4 to 8, and most preferably 4 or 6.
 前記一般式(12)中、R62は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子又はメチル基を表し、水素原子又はメチル基がより好ましい。L62は2価の連結基を表し、n1は1以上18以下の整数を表し、2~12がより好ましく、4~8が更に好ましく、4又は6であることが最も好ましい。 In the general formula (12), R 62 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. L 62 represents a divalent linking group, n1 represents an integer of 1 to 18, more preferably 2 to 12, still more preferably 4 to 8, and most preferably 4 or 6.
 L61及びL62はそれぞれ独立に2価の置換基であれば限定はないが、下記一般式(14)で表される構造であることがより好ましい。ここで(a)は二重結合側に結合する位置、(b)はフルオロ脂肪族基側に結合する位置を各々示す。
一般式(14): (a)-X10-R20-(b)
 一般式(14)中、X10は単結合、又は*-COO-**、*-COS-**、*-O
CO-**、*-CON(R21)-**、*-O-**で示される2価の連結基を表す。ここで*は二重結合側に結合する位置、**はR20に結合する位置を各々示す。
 R20は、置換基を有していてもよいポリメチレン基(例えばメチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基など)、置換基を有していてもよいフェニレン基(例えばo-フェニレン基、m-フェニレン基、p-フェニレン基など)、及びそれらの任意の組み合わせにより形成できる基を表す。中ではポリメチレン基がより好ましく、ポリメチレン基の中でもメチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、及びテトラメチレン基が好ましく、メチレン基及びエチレン基が更に好ましい。
L 61 and L 62 are not limited as long as they are each independently a divalent substituent, but a structure represented by the following general formula (14) is more preferable. Here, (a) shows the position bonded to the double bond side, and (b) shows the position bonded to the fluoroaliphatic group side.
Formula (14): (a) -X 10 -R 20 - (b)
In the general formula (14), X 10 is a single bond or * -COO-**, * -COS-**, * -O.
Represents a divalent linking group represented by CO-**, * -CON (R 21 )-**, * -O-**. Here, * represents a position bonded to the double bond side, and ** represents a position bonded to R 20 .
R 20 represents an optionally substituted polymethylene group (eg, methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group), an optionally substituted phenylene group (eg, o-phenylene group, m-phenylene group). , P-phenylene group, and the like, and a group that can be formed by any combination thereof. Among them, a polymethylene group is more preferable, and among the polymethylene groups, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a trimethylene group, and a tetramethylene group are preferable, and a methylene group and an ethylene group are still more preferable.
 R21は、水素原子又は炭素数1~8の置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、あるは炭素数6~20の置換基を有してもよいアリール基を表し、水素原子又は炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましく、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が更に好ましい。 R 21 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or an aryl group which may have a substituent having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. A 1-6 alkyl group is more preferable, and a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is still more preferable.
 前記一般式(11)で表されるフルオロ脂肪族基含有モノマーは、下記一般式(11’)で表されるモノマーであることがより好ましい。 The fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomer represented by the general formula (11) is more preferably a monomer represented by the following general formula (11 ').
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 一般式(11’)中、X1は-O-、-S-又は-N(R222)-で表される二価基を表し、pは1~8の整数を表す。X1は-O-又は-N(R222)-であることがより好ましく、-O-であることが最も好ましい。pは1~6がより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましい。R61及びm1は、前記一般式(11)で説明したそれぞれと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。また、R222は水素原子又は炭素数1~8の置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、又は炭素数6~20の置換基を有してもよいアリール基を表す。 In formula (11 ′), X 1 represents a divalent group represented by —O—, —S— or —N (R 222 ) —, and p represents an integer of 1 to 8. X 1 is more preferably —O— or —N (R 222 ) —, and most preferably —O—. p is more preferably from 1 to 6, and still more preferably from 1 to 3. R 61 and m1 have the same meanings as described in the general formula (11), and the preferred ranges are also the same. R 222 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or an aryl group which may have a substituent having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
 前記一般式(12)で表されるフルオロ脂肪族基含有モノマーの中でも、下記一般式(12’)で表されるモノマーが好ましい。 Among the fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomers represented by the general formula (12), monomers represented by the following general formula (12 ′) are preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 一般式(12’)中、X2は-O-、-S-又は-N(R222)-で表される置換基を表し、qは1~8の整数を表す。X2は-O-又は-N(R222)-であることがより好ましく、-O-であることが最も好ましい。pは1~6がより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましい。R62及びn1は、前記一般式(12)で説明したそれぞれと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。また、R222は一般式(11’)で説明したものと同義である。 In the general formula (12 ′), X 2 represents a substituent represented by —O—, —S— or —N (R 222 ) —, and q represents an integer of 1 to 8. X 2 is more preferably —O— or —N (R 222 ) —, and most preferably —O—. p is more preferably from 1 to 6, and still more preferably from 1 to 3. R 62 and n1 have the same meanings as described in the general formula (12), and the preferred ranges are also the same. R 222 has the same meaning as that described in formula (11 ′).
 次に、一般式(13)で表されるアミド基含有モノマーの重合単位について説明する。
 一般式(13)中、R73は水素原子、ハロゲン原子又はメチル基を表し、水素原子又はメチル基がより好ましい。R71及びR72はそれぞれ独立に水素原子、炭素数1~18のアルキル基、炭素数6~20の芳香族基又は炭素数1~20のヘテロ環基を表し、これらの置換基はさらに置換基を有していてもよい。また、炭素数1~12のアルキル基、炭素数6~15の芳香族基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基、炭素数6~12の芳香族基であることがさらに好ましい。また、R71とR72が互いに連結して複素環を形成してもよく、形成されるヘテロ環の種類としては、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、モルホリン環などが挙げられる。
Next, the polymerization unit of the amide group-containing monomer represented by the general formula (13) will be described.
In the general formula (13), R 73 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a methyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. R 71 and R 72 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and these substituents are further substituted It may have a group. Further, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms and an aromatic group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms are more preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms and an aromatic group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms are further included. preferable. R 71 and R 72 may be linked to each other to form a heterocyclic ring. Examples of the formed heterocyclic ring include a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, and a morpholine ring.
 また、前記水平配向剤として用いるポリマーは、フルオロ脂肪族基含有モノマー又はアミド基含有モノマーのいずれかを重合単位として含んでいればよいが、好ましくは、フルオロ脂肪族基含有モノマー及びアミド基含有モノマーの両方を重合単位として含むものである。該ポリマーにはそれぞれのモノマーは重合単位として2種以上含まれていてもよく、また、それ以外に共重合可能な他のモノマーを一種以上重合単位として含む共重合体であってもよい。このような共重合可能な他の種類のモノマーとしては、Polymer Handbook 2nd ed.,J.Brandrup,Wiley lnterscience(1975)Chapter 2 Page1~483記載のものを用いることができる。例えば、アクリル酸エステル類、メタクリル酸エステル類、メタクリルアミド類、アリル化合物、ビニルエーテル類、ビニルエステル類等から選ばれる付加重合性不飽和結合を1個有する化合物等を挙げることができる。 Further, the polymer used as the horizontal alignment agent may contain either a fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomer or an amide group-containing monomer as a polymerized unit, but preferably a fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomer and an amide group-containing monomer. Both are included as polymerized units. The polymer may contain two or more kinds of each monomer as polymerized units, or may be a copolymer containing one or more other copolymerizable monomers as polymerized units. Other types of such copolymerizable monomers include Polymer Handbook 2nd ed. , J .; Brandrup, Wiley Interscience (1975) Chapter 2, Pages 1-483 can be used. Examples thereof include compounds having one addition polymerizable unsaturated bond selected from acrylic esters, methacrylic esters, methacrylamides, allyl compounds, vinyl ethers, vinyl esters and the like.
 前記水平配向剤として用いられるポリマーの好ましい質量平均分子量は、2000~100,000であり、より好ましくは3000~80,000であり、さらに好ましくは4,000~60,000である。ここで、質量平均分子量及び分子量は、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、TSKgel G2000HxL(何れも東ソー(株)製の商品名)のカラムを使用したGPC分析装置により、溶媒THF、示差屈折計検出によるポリスチレン換算で表した分子量である。 The preferred mass average molecular weight of the polymer used as the horizontal alignment agent is 2000 to 100,000, more preferably 3000 to 80,000, and still more preferably 4,000 to 60,000. Here, the mass average molecular weight and the molecular weight are converted to polystyrene by GTH analyzer using a column of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, TSKgel G2000HxL (both are trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and detected by a solvent THF and a differential refractometer. Is the molecular weight.
 以下、本発明に水平配向剤として使用可能なポリマーの具体的な構造の例を示すが、以下の具体例に制限されるものではない。なお式中の数字は各モノマー成分の質量比率を示す。Mwは質量平均分子量を表す。 Hereinafter, examples of specific structures of polymers that can be used as the horizontal alignment agent in the present invention will be shown, but the present invention is not limited to the following specific examples. In addition, the number in a formula shows the mass ratio of each monomer component. Mw represents a mass average molecular weight.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 その他、特開2005-99248号公報、特開2005-134884号公報、特開2006-126768号公報、特開2006-267183号公報記載の水平配向剤を選択してもよい。 In addition, horizontal alignment agents described in JP-A-2005-99248, JP-A-2005-134484, JP-A-2006-126768, and JP-A-2006-267183 may be selected.
 本発明においては、前記水平配向剤を1種のみ用いてもよいし、2種以上を用いてもよい。前記水平配向剤の添加量は、前記二色性色素の添加量に対して0.1質量%~10質量%であるのが好ましく、0.5質量%~10質量%であることがさらに好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることが特に好ましい。 In the present invention, only one horizontal alignment agent may be used, or two or more horizontal alignment agents may be used. The addition amount of the horizontal alignment agent is preferably from 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably from 0.5% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the addition amount of the dichroic dye. A mass% to 5 mass% is particularly preferred.
 なお、本明細書では、「チルト角」とは、色素の分子の長軸方向と界面(配向膜界面あるいは空気界面)のなす角度を意味する。本発明の組成物を偏光膜の作製に利用する場合は、配向膜側のチルト角を小さくし、水平配向させることにより、偏光素子として好ましい光学性能が得られる。したがって、偏光性能の観点から、好ましい配向膜側のチルト角は0°~10°、さらに好ましくは0°~5°、特に好ましいのは0°~2°、最も好ましくは0°~1°である。また、好ましい空気界面側のチルト角は0°~10°、さらに好ましくは0~5°、特に好ましいのは0~2°である。
 本発明の組成物が、
(1)一般式(10)で表されるフルオロ脂肪族基含有化合物;及び
(2)一般式(11)もしくは一般式(12)で表されるフルオロ脂肪族基含有モノマーの重合単位及び一般式(13)で表されるアミド基含有モノマーの重合単位を少なくとも一種含むポリマー;
の少なくとも一種を含むことにより、これを用いた偏光子における配向膜側のチルト角を、例えば、2°以下に抑えることができるであろう。
In the present specification, “tilt angle” means an angle formed between the major axis direction of the dye molecule and the interface (alignment film interface or air interface). When the composition of the present invention is used for the production of a polarizing film, a preferable optical performance as a polarizing element can be obtained by reducing the tilt angle on the alignment film side and performing horizontal alignment. Therefore, from the viewpoint of polarization performance, the preferred tilt angle on the alignment film side is 0 ° to 10 °, more preferably 0 ° to 5 °, particularly preferably 0 ° to 2 °, and most preferably 0 ° to 1 °. is there. The tilt angle on the air interface side is preferably 0 ° to 10 °, more preferably 0 to 5 °, and particularly preferably 0 to 2 °.
The composition of the present invention is
(1) a fluoroaliphatic group-containing compound represented by general formula (10); and (2) a polymerized unit and a general formula of a fluoroaliphatic group-containing monomer represented by general formula (11) or general formula (12) A polymer comprising at least one polymerized unit of an amide group-containing monomer represented by (13);
By including at least one of the above, the tilt angle on the alignment film side in the polarizer using this may be suppressed to 2 ° or less, for example.
糖類:
 本発明の組成物には、糖類を添加してもよい。糖類を添加することにより色素会合体の会合度を向上させ、その結果として色素の分子配向性を高めることができる。
 使用可能な糖類としては、単糖、二糖、多糖、及び糖アルコール類などの糖の誘導体が挙げられる。糖類の中でも、分子会合性に寄与するという点から、水酸基が2以上、よ好ましくは3以上であり、且つ好ましくは18以下、更に好ましくは12以下であるものが好ましい。水酸基の数が上記範囲であると、色素との相互作用が適度になり、相互作用が強すぎることによって生じる析出がなく、適度な相互作用により配向性を向上させることができるので好ましい。
Sugars:
Saccharides may be added to the composition of the present invention. By adding saccharides, the degree of association of the dye aggregate can be improved, and as a result, the molecular orientation of the dye can be enhanced.
Examples of saccharides that can be used include monosaccharides, disaccharides, polysaccharides, and sugar derivatives such as sugar alcohols. Among saccharides, those having a hydroxyl group of 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and preferably 18 or less, more preferably 12 or less, are preferred from the viewpoint of contributing to molecular association. When the number of hydroxyl groups is within the above range, the interaction with the dye is moderate, there is no precipitation caused by the interaction being too strong, and the orientation can be improved by the moderate interaction, which is preferable.
 使用する糖類の分子量としては、1,000以下が好ましく、更に好ましくは700以下である。糖類の分子量が上記範囲であると、色素との相分離が生じず、色素の配向性の改善に寄与できるので好ましい。
 また、使用する糖類の炭素数としては、通常36以下、好ましくは24以下である。糖類の炭素数が前記範囲であると、色素との相分離が生じず、色素の配向性の改善に寄与できるので好ましい。
The molecular weight of the saccharide used is preferably 1,000 or less, more preferably 700 or less. When the molecular weight of the saccharide is within the above range, phase separation from the dye does not occur, and it can contribute to improvement of the orientation of the dye, which is preferable.
Moreover, as carbon number of saccharides to be used, it is 36 or less normally, Preferably it is 24 or less. When the carbon number of the saccharide is within the above range, phase separation from the dye does not occur, and it can contribute to improvement of the orientation of the dye, which is preferable.
 本発明において使用可能な糖類の例には、単糖、オリゴ糖、単糖アルコールが含まれ、水酸基数、及び分子量が、前記好ましい範囲のものを使用するのが好ましい。 Examples of saccharides that can be used in the present invention include monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, and monosaccharide alcohols, and it is preferable to use those having the number of hydroxyl groups and the molecular weight within the above preferred ranges.
 単糖としては、例えばキシロース、リボース、グルコース、フルクトース、マンノース、ソルボース、ガラクトースなどが挙げられる。
 オリゴ糖としては、例えばトレハロース、コウジビオース、ニゲロース、マルトース、マルトトリオース、イソマルトトリオース、マルトテトラオース、イソマルトース、ソホロース、ラミナリビオース、セロビオース、ゲンチオビオース、ラクトース、スクロース、メリビオース、ルチノース、プリメベロース、ツラノース、パノース、イソパノース、セロトリオース、マンニノトリオース、ソラトリオース、メレジトース、プランテオース、ゲンチアノース、ウンベリフェロース、ラフィノース、スタキオースなどが挙げられる。
 糖アルコールとしては、例えばトレイトール、キシリトール、リビトール、アラビトール、ソルビトール、マンニトールなど前述の単糖及びオリゴ糖を還元した化合物が挙げられる。
Examples of monosaccharides include xylose, ribose, glucose, fructose, mannose, sorbose, and galactose.
Examples of the oligosaccharide include trehalose, kojibiose, nigerose, maltose, maltotriose, isomaltotriose, maltotetraose, isomaltose, sophorose, laminaribiose, cellobiose, gentiobiose, lactose, sucrose, melibiose, lutinose, primiverose, Examples include turanose, panose, isopanose, cellotriose, manninotriose, soratriose, melezitose, planteose, gentianose, umbelliferose, raffinose, and stachyose.
Examples of the sugar alcohol include compounds obtained by reducing the above monosaccharides and oligosaccharides such as threitol, xylitol, ribitol, arabitol, sorbitol, and mannitol.
 糖類としては、特に好ましくはキシロース、マンノース、マルトース、マルトトリオース、アラビトールが挙げられる。 As the saccharide, xylose, mannose, maltose, maltotriose and arabitol are particularly preferable.
 なお、これらの糖類、糖アルコール類は各々光学異性体が存在するが、本発明で用いる組成物中にはそれぞれを単独で用いてもよく、両方を含んでいてもよい。また、糖類は、本発明の組成物中に、1種が単独で用いられていてもよく、2種以上が組み合せて用いられていてもよい。 These saccharides and sugar alcohols each have optical isomers, but each of them may be used alone or both may be included in the composition used in the present invention. Moreover, saccharides may be used individually by 1 type in the composition of this invention, and 2 or more types may be used in combination.
 本発明の組成物中における、色素に対する糖類の含有量は、質量比で0.1以上、1以下の範囲であることが好ましい。更に好ましくは0.2以上、特に好ましくは0.3以上、更に好ましくは0.7以下、特に好ましくは0.6以下である。糖類の含有量が前記範囲であると、色素会合体の会合度を改善する効果が得られる。 In the composition of the present invention, the saccharide content relative to the pigment is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 1 in terms of mass ratio. More preferably, it is 0.2 or more, particularly preferably 0.3 or more, further preferably 0.7 or less, and particularly preferably 0.6 or less. When the saccharide content is in the above range, an effect of improving the association degree of the dye aggregate can be obtained.
防黴剤、抗菌剤及び殺菌剤:
 本発明の組成物には、防黴、抗菌及び殺菌の少なくともいずれかの機能を有する薬剤を添加してもよい。これらの添加剤を添加することにより、当該組成物の保存安定性を向上させることができる。
Antifungal, antibacterial and fungicides:
You may add the chemical | medical agent which has at least any function of antifungal, antibacterial, and disinfection to the composition of this invention. By adding these additives, the storage stability of the composition can be improved.
 本発明で言う防黴、抗菌及び殺菌の少なくともいずれかの機能を有する薬剤とは、カビの発生・生育・増殖を抑制する防黴能、微生物を死滅される殺菌能、微生物の発生・生育・増殖を抑制する抗菌能の少なくともいずれかの機能を有する薬剤であればいずれでもよく、公知の防黴剤、殺菌剤、抗菌剤が使用できる。ただし、本発明の組成物を用いて作成した異方性膜の光学特性を低下させないものであることが好ましい。本発明に用いられる防黴、抗菌及び殺菌の少なくともいずれかの機能を有する薬剤としては、例えば、従来の2,4,4′-トリクロロ-2′-ヒドロキシジフェニルなどのフェノール系、二酸化塩素などの塩素系、ヨウ素などのヨウ素系、塩化ベンザルコニウムなどの第4級アンモニウム塩系等が挙げられる。 The agent having at least one of antifungal, antibacterial, and sterilizing functions as referred to in the present invention is an antifungal ability that suppresses the generation / growth / growth of mold, the bactericidal ability that kills microorganisms, the generation / growth of microorganisms, Any agent may be used as long as it has at least one function of antibacterial ability to suppress proliferation, and known antifungal agents, bactericides and antibacterial agents can be used. However, it is preferable that the optical properties of the anisotropic film prepared using the composition of the present invention are not deteriorated. Examples of the agent having at least one of antifungal, antibacterial and bactericidal functions used in the present invention include, for example, conventional phenolic compounds such as 2,4,4′-trichloro-2′-hydroxydiphenyl, chlorine dioxide and the like. Examples thereof include iodine, such as chlorine and iodine, and quaternary ammonium salt, such as benzalkonium chloride.
 また、1,2-benzisothiazoline-3-oneを有効成分とするものとして、Proxel BDN、Proxel BD20、Proxel GXL、Proxel LV、Proxel XL、Proxel XL2、Proxel Ultra10(以上、Avecia社製、商品名)、polyhexametylene biguanide hydrochlorideを有効成分とするものとして、Proxel IB、(Avecia社製、商品名)、Dithio-2,2’-bis(benzmethylamide)を有効成分とするものとしてDensil P(Avecia社製、商品名)等も挙げられる。
 また、下記化合物は、特に極微量で抗菌効果を示すことから特に好ましい。
No. 化合物名
1.  2-クロロメチル-5-クロロ-3-イソチアゾロン
2.  2-シアノメチル-5-クロロ-3-イソチアゾロン
3.  2-ヒドロキシメチル-5-クロロ-3-イソチアゾロン
4.  2-(3-メチルシクロヘキシル)-3-イソチアゾロン
5.  2-(4-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジクロロ-3-イソチアゾロン
6.  2-(4-エチルフェニル)-3-イソチアゾロン
7.  2-(4-ニトロフェニル)-5-クロロ-3-イソチアゾロン
8.  2-クロロメチル-3-イソチアゾロン
9.  2-メトキシフェニル-4-メチル-5-クロロ-3-イソチアゾロン
10. 2-モルフォリノメチル-5-クロロ-3-イソチアゾロン
 これらの化合物は、例えば特開平2-278号公報等を参考に合成することが可能であるが、商品名:トリバクトラン(ヘキスト社製)等の市販品を利用することも可能である。
In addition, as an active ingredient, 1,2-benzisothiazole-3-one, Proxel BDN, Proxel BD20, Proxel GXL, Proxel LV, Proxel XL, Proxel XL2, Proxel Ultra10 (trade name, manufactured by Avecia) Polyhexylene biguanide hydrochloride as an active ingredient, Proxel IB (Avecia, product name), Dithio-2,2'-bis (benzmethylamide) as an active ingredient, Densil P (Aveci product, Aveci product) ) And the like.
Further, the following compounds are particularly preferable because they exhibit an antibacterial effect particularly in a very small amount.
No. Compound name 2-chloromethyl-5-chloro-3-isothiazolone 2-cyanomethyl-5-chloro-3-isothiazolone 2-hydroxymethyl-5-chloro-3-isothiazolone4. 2- (3-Methylcyclohexyl) -3-isothiazolone 2- (4-Chlorophenyl) -4,5-dichloro-3-isothiazolone 6. 2- (4-Ethylphenyl) -3-isothiazolone 2- (4-Nitrophenyl) -5-chloro-3-isothiazolone 2-chloromethyl-3-isothiazolone9. 2-methoxyphenyl-4-methyl-5-chloro-3-isothiazolone 2-morpholinomethyl-5-chloro-3-isothiazolone These compounds can be synthesized with reference to, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 2-278, but trade names such as Tribactran (manufactured by Hoechst), etc. Commercial products can also be used.
 また、本発明で用いることのできる防黴、抗菌及び殺菌の少なくともいずれかの機能を有する薬剤は、これを単独で又は2種以上組み合わせて使用することもできる。
 上記の防黴、抗菌及び殺菌の少なくともいずれかの機能を有する薬剤の、前記組成物中の含有量は、特に限定されないが、通常0.01質量%以上、好ましくは0.001質量%以上であり、一方、通常0.5質量%以下、好ましくは0.3質量%以下である。前記範囲であると、薬剤が析出することがなく、また色素膜を成膜した際に相分離が生じ、点欠陥や光散乱などの光学的欠陥を生じさせることなく、これらの剤の添加効果が得られる。
Moreover, the chemical | medical agent which has at least any one function of antifungal, antibacterial, and disinfection which can be used by this invention can also be used individually or in combination of 2 or more types.
The content of the agent having at least one of antifungal, antibacterial and sterilizing functions in the composition is not particularly limited, but is usually 0.01% by mass or more, preferably 0.001% by mass or more. On the other hand, it is usually 0.5% by mass or less, preferably 0.3% by mass or less. When the amount is within the above range, the agent does not precipitate, phase separation occurs when the dye film is formed, and the addition effect of these agents does not cause optical defects such as point defects and light scattering. Is obtained.
 本発明の組成物を偏光膜の作製に利用する態様では、高い偏光度の偏光膜を得るために、前記組成物中に、電子不足である(Electron-Deficient)盤状化合物及び電子リッチである(Electron-Rich)化合物を含有させることが好ましい。本発明において、電子不足である(Electron-Deficient)盤状化合物及び電子リッチである(Electron-Rich)化合物としては、例えば、特開2006-323377号公報に記載のものを用いることができる。 In an embodiment in which the composition of the present invention is used for the production of a polarizing film, an electron-deficient discotic compound and an electron-rich compound are contained in the composition in order to obtain a polarizing film having a high degree of polarization. It is preferable to contain an (Electron-Rich) compound. In the present invention, for example, those described in JP-A-2006-323377 can be used as the electron-deficient discotic compound and the electron-rich compound.
 前記電子不足である(Electron-Deficient)盤状化合物の割合は、組成物全体を100質量部とした場合に、通常0.1質量部以上、好ましくは0.2質量部以上、また、通常50質量部以下、好ましくは40質量部以下の範囲である。前記範囲であると、組成物を溶液として調製した際似、粘度を過度に上昇させることなく、該化合物の添加効果を得ることができる。 The ratio of the electron-deficient discotic compound is usually 0.1 parts by mass or more, preferably 0.2 parts by mass or more, and usually 50 parts by mass, when the total composition is 100 parts by mass. The range is not more than part by mass, preferably not more than 40 parts by mass. When the content is within the above range, the effect of adding the compound can be obtained without excessively increasing the viscosity when the composition is prepared as a solution.
 前記電子リッチである(Electron-Rich)化合物の割合は、組成物全体を100質量部とした場合に、通常50質量部以下、好ましくは40質量部以下の範囲である。前記範囲であると、粘度を過度に上昇させることなく、該化合物の添加効果を得ることができる。 The ratio of the electron-rich compound is usually 50 parts by mass or less, preferably 40 parts by mass or less when the entire composition is 100 parts by mass. The addition effect of this compound can be acquired, without raising a viscosity too much that it is the said range.
 また、電子不足である(Electron-Deficient)盤状化合物と電子リッチである(Electron-Rich)化合物との質量分率は、通常10/90~90/10の範囲内であることが好ましい。この範囲を外れると、電子不足である(Electron-Deficient)盤状化合物又は電子リッチである(Electron-Rich)化合物の使用による効果が得られないおそれがあるため好ましくない。 Also, the mass fraction of the electron-deficient discotic compound and the electron-rich compound is usually preferably in the range of 10/90 to 90/10. Outside this range, it is not preferable because the effect of using an electron-deficient discotic compound or an electron-rich compound may not be obtained.
非液晶性のバインダーポリマー:
 本発明の組成物には、バインダとして、非液晶性ポリマーを含有してもよい。非液晶性ポリマーの例として、ポリアクリロニトリル、ポリアクリル酸エステル、ポリアクリルアミド等のアクリル系樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、ポリビニルアセトアセタール、ポリビニルブチラールなどのポリビニルアセタール系樹脂、エチルセルロース、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、エチルヒドロキシセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、エチルヒドロキシエチルセルロース、メチルセルロース、酢酸セルロース、酢酪酸セルロース、酢酸プロピオン酸セルロース、硝酸セルロース等の変性セルロース系樹脂ニトロセルロース、エチルヒドロキシエチルセルロース及びエチルセルロースなどのセルロース系樹脂や、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、フェノキシ樹脂、フェノール樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、各種エストラマー等が挙げられる。これらは単独で用いる他、これらを混合、又は共重合して用いることも可能である。
 非液晶性のバインダーポリマーとしては、特にアクリル系ポリマー(アクリル系共重合体、スチレン系共重合体を主鎖とする樹脂)が好ましく、有機溶剤に可溶であることが特に好ましい。
Non-liquid crystalline binder polymer:
The composition of the present invention may contain a non-liquid crystalline polymer as a binder. Examples of non-liquid crystalline polymers include acrylic resins such as polyacrylonitrile, polyacrylic acid esters and polyacrylamide, polyvinyl acetal resins such as polystyrene resin, polyvinyl acetoacetal and polyvinyl butyral, ethyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, ethyl hydroxy cellulose, hydroxy Modified cellulose resins such as propyl cellulose, ethyl hydroxyethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose nitrate, etc., cellulose resins such as ethyl hydroxyethyl cellulose and ethyl cellulose, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, Polyester resin, polycarbonate resin, phenoxy resin, phenol resin , Epoxy resins, various elastomers, and the like. These may be used alone, or may be mixed or copolymerized for use.
As the non-liquid crystalline binder polymer, an acrylic polymer (a resin having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain) is particularly preferable, and it is particularly preferable that the non-liquid crystalline binder polymer is soluble in an organic solvent.
 アクリルポリマーの製造には、例えば、公知のラジカル重合法による方法を適用することができる。ラジカル重合法で製造する際の温度、圧力、ラジカル開始剤の種類及びその量、溶媒の種類等々の重合条件は、当業者において容易に設定可能であり、実験的に条件を定めるようにすることもできる。 For the production of the acrylic polymer, for example, a known radical polymerization method can be applied. Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. in the production by the radical polymerization method can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and the conditions should be determined experimentally. You can also.
 上記のアクリル系ポリマーの具体的な共重合成分については、不飽和カルボン酸(例、(メタ)アクリル酸、クロトン酸、イタコン酸、マレイン酸及びフマル酸)、芳香族ビニル化合物(例、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、2-ビニルピリジン、4-ビニルピリジン、N-ビニルイミダゾールなど)、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル(例、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、i-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ドデシル(メタ)アクリレートなど)、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルアリールエステル(例、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートなど)、(メタ)アクリル酸置換アルキルエステル(例、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートなど)、カルボン酸ビニルエステル(例、酢酸ビニル及びプロピオン酸ビニル)、シアン化ビニル(例、(メタ)アクリロニトリル及びα-クロロアクリロニトリル)、及び脂肪族共役ジエン(例、1、3-ブタジエン及びイソプレン)を挙げることができる。これらの中で、不飽和カルボン酸、芳香族ビニル化合物、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルアリールエステル及びカルボン酸ビニルエステルが好ましい。ここで(メタ)アクリル酸はアクリル酸とメタクリル酸を合わせた総称であり、以下も同様に(メタ)アクリレートはアクリレートとメタクリレートの総称である。
 更に側鎖に(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するアクリル系ポリマーや共重合成分としてマクロモノマー(例えばポリスチレンマクロモノマー、ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレートなど)を含むアクリル系グラフトポリマーも好ましいものとして挙げられる。
 これらは、1種単独で或いは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
As for specific copolymerization components of the above acrylic polymer, unsaturated carboxylic acid (eg, (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, itaconic acid, maleic acid and fumaric acid), aromatic vinyl compound (eg, styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, 2-vinylpyridine, 4-vinylpyridine, N-vinylimidazole, etc.), (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters (eg, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl) (Meth) acrylate, i-butyl (meth) acrylate, hexyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dodecyl (meth) acrylate, etc.), (meth) acrylic acid alkyl aryl ester (eg, benzyl (meth) acrylate, etc.) ), (Meth) acrylic acid substituted alkyl ester Tellurium (eg, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate), carboxylic acid vinyl esters (eg, vinyl acetate and vinyl propionate), vinyl cyanide (eg, (meth) acrylonitrile and α-chloro) Acrylonitrile) and aliphatic conjugated dienes (eg, 1,3-butadiene and isoprene). Of these, unsaturated carboxylic acids, aromatic vinyl compounds, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl aryl esters and carboxylic acid vinyl esters are preferred. Here, (meth) acrylic acid is a generic term for acrylic acid and methacrylic acid together, and (meth) acrylate is a generic term for acrylate and methacrylate.
Furthermore, an acrylic polymer having a (meth) acryloyl group in the side chain or a macromonomer (for example, a polystyrene macromonomer, a polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer, a polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, a polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, a polyethylene as a copolymerization component) An acrylic graft polymer containing glycol polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate and the like is also preferable.
These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
1.-3 黒色着色組成物の態様
 本発明の二色性色素組成物の色調については特に制限はなく、用途に応じて、種々の色調の着色組成物として調製することができる。例えば、偏光膜の作製に利用する態様では、黒色の着色組成物となるように、2種以上の色素を混合するのが好ましい。本発明の二色性色素組成物の一態様は、イエロー色素、マゼンタ色素、及びシアン色素をそれぞれ含有する黒色の着色組成物である。本態様において、前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素は、いずれの色調の色素として利用されていてもよい。また、前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素であってそれぞれ異なる色調の色素を2種以上用いて、本態様の組成物を調製してもよい。
 なお、本明細書において、イエロー色素とは、吸収極大波長が400~500nmの範囲にある色素をいい、マゼンタ色素とは、吸収極大波長が500~580nmの範囲にある色素をいい、シアン色素とは、吸収極大波長が580nm~700nmの範囲にある色素をいう。極大吸収波長は、有機溶媒に色素を溶解した溶液を調製し、該溶液の吸収スペクトルを測定することで知ることができる。有機溶媒としては、例えば、NMP(N-メチルピロリドン)が利用される。
1. -3 Aspect of Black Coloring Composition There is no particular limitation on the color tone of the dichroic dye composition of the present invention, and it can be prepared as a coloring composition of various color tones depending on the application. For example, in an embodiment used for the production of a polarizing film, it is preferable to mix two or more dyes so as to obtain a black colored composition. One aspect of the dichroic dye composition of the present invention is a black coloring composition containing a yellow dye, a magenta dye, and a cyan dye, respectively. In this embodiment, the dichroic dye represented by the general formula (I) may be used as a dye having any color tone. Further, the composition of this embodiment may be prepared by using two or more kinds of dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) and having different color tones.
In the present specification, a yellow dye means a dye having an absorption maximum wavelength in the range of 400 to 500 nm, and a magenta dye means a dye having an absorption maximum wavelength in the range of 500 to 580 nm. Means a dye having an absorption maximum wavelength in the range of 580 nm to 700 nm. The maximum absorption wavelength can be known by preparing a solution in which a dye is dissolved in an organic solvent and measuring the absorption spectrum of the solution. For example, NMP (N-methylpyrrolidone) is used as the organic solvent.
 本態様の一例は、前記一般式(III)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種をイエロー色素として含有する黒色着色組成物である。
 他の例は、前記一般式(III)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種をイエロー色素として含有するとともに、シアン色素を含有する黒色着色組成物である。前記一般式(III)で表されるイエロー色素は、シアン色素と混合することによって、黒色を実現できる。勿論さらにマゼンタ色素を含有していてもよい。
 他の例は、前記一般式(IV)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種をマゼンタ色素として含有する黒色着色組成物である。
 また本態様の他の例は、前記一般式(III)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種をイエロー色素として、及び前記一般式(IV)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種をマゼンタ色素として含有する、黒色着色組成物である。
 本態様において利用されるシアン色素については特に制限はないが、二色比を高めるためには、シアン色素も、液晶性を有する、二色性アゾ色素であるのが好ましい。液晶性を有する、二色性アゾ色素としては、例えば下記一般式(1)および(2)で表される化合物が好ましい。
An example of this embodiment is a black colored composition containing at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (III) as a yellow dye.
Another example is a black colored composition containing at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (III) as a yellow dye and a cyan dye. The yellow dye represented by the general formula (III) can achieve black color by mixing with a cyan dye. Of course, it may further contain a magenta dye.
Another example is a black coloring composition containing at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (IV) as a magenta dye.
In another example of this embodiment, at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (III) is used as a yellow dye, and at least one dichroic dye represented by the general formula (IV) is used. A black colored composition containing seeds as magenta dyes.
Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the cyan dye utilized in this aspect, In order to raise dichroic ratio, it is preferable that a cyan dye is also a dichroic azo dye which has liquid crystallinity. As the dichroic azo dye having liquid crystallinity, for example, compounds represented by the following general formulas (1) and (2) are preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 式中、R1~R5はそれぞれ独立に水素原子または置換基を表す。R6およびR7はそれぞれ独立に水素原子または置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。Q1は置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基、芳香族複素環基またはシクロヘキサン環基を表す。L1は2価の連結基を表す。Aは酸素原子または硫黄原子を表す。 In the formula, R 1 to R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. R 6 and R 7 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent. Q 1 represents an optionally substituted aromatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic heterocyclic group or cyclohexane ring group. L 1 represents a divalent linking group. A represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 式中、R8およびR9はそれぞれ独立に水素原子または置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。Q2は置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表す。Q3は置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香族炭化水素基または2価の芳香族複素環基を表し、nは1から4の整数を表すし、nが2以上のとき、複数のQ3は同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula, R 8 and R 9 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent. Q 2 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent. Q 3 represents an optionally substituted divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group or divalent aromatic heterocyclic group, n represents an integer of 1 to 4, and when n is 2 or more, A plurality of Q 3 may be the same or different.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物のうち、特に好ましいものは、下記一般式(3)で表される化合物である。 Among the compounds represented by the general formula (1), particularly preferred are compounds represented by the following general formula (3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
式中、R10~R13はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はアルキル基を表し;R14は水素原子又はメチル基を表し;R15及びR16はそれぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表し;B1は窒素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子を表し;L2はアゾ基、アシルオキシ基(-C(=O)O-)、オキシカルボニル基(-OC(=O)-)、又はイミノ基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
In the formula, R 10 to R 13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group; R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group; and R 15 and R 16 each independently have a substituent. B 1 represents a nitrogen atom or an optionally substituted carbon atom; L 2 represents an azo group, an acyloxy group (—C (═O) O—), an oxycarbonyl group (— OC (= O)-) or an imino group.
 前記一般式(2)で表される化合物のうち、特に好ましいものは、下記一般式(4)で表される化合物である。 Among the compounds represented by the general formula (2), particularly preferred are compounds represented by the following general formula (4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 式中、R17~R20はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表し;R21及びR22はそれぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表し;B2は窒素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子を表し;mは1又は2を表し、mが2以上のとき、2つのR17~R20はそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula, R 17 to R 20 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; R 21 and R 22 each independently represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent; B 2 represents a nitrogen atom Or represents an optionally substituted carbon atom; m represents 1 or 2, and when m is 2 or more, two R 17 to R 20 may be the same or different.
 また、勿論、シアン色素として、前記一般式(I)で表される化合物を利用してもよい。
 また、本態様において、色素の含有比については特に制限はない。同程度の量が添加されるであろう。
Of course, the compound represented by the general formula (I) may be used as the cyan dye.
Moreover, in this embodiment, there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the content ratio of a pigment | dye. Similar amounts will be added.
 本態様の黒色組成物を利用することにより、光源としてC光源を用いたときの透過光が、xy色度図において、0.28<x<0.36、0.28<y<0.36を満足する偏光膜を作製することができる。この条件を満足すると、例えば、液晶セルにおいて該偏光膜を液晶層とカラーフィルタ層の間に配置した場合、RGBのカラーフィルタのよって生じる可視全域にわたる散乱を抑制することができるので好ましい。
 なお、C光源、xy色度図、並びにx及びyの求め方については、日本規格協会発行JISハンドブック[61]色彩に詳細な記載があり、参照することができる。
By using the black composition of this embodiment, the transmitted light when the C light source is used as the light source is 0.28 <x <0.36, 0.28 <y <0.36 in the xy chromaticity diagram. Can be produced. When this condition is satisfied, for example, when the polarizing film is disposed between the liquid crystal layer and the color filter layer in the liquid crystal cell, it is preferable because scattering over the entire visible region caused by the RGB color filter can be suppressed.
The C light source, the xy chromaticity diagram, and how to obtain x and y are described in detail in the JIS Handbook [61] color issued by the Japanese Standards Association and can be referred to.
2. 本発明の二色性色素組成物の用途
 本発明の二色性色素組成物は、種々の用途に利用できる。高い二色比を示すので、偏光膜の形成材料として利用するのが好ましい。以下、本発明の組成物から形成される偏光膜について説明する。
2.-1 偏光膜
 本発明は、本発明の前記二色性色素組成物から形成された偏光膜にも関する。本発明の偏光膜は、任意の直線偏光を透過し、該直線偏光と偏光面が直交する偏光を吸収又は反射、後方散乱するもの;及び右又は左円偏光を透過し、該円偏光とらせんが逆向きの円偏光を吸収又は反射、後方散乱するもの;のいずれであってもよい。
 本発明の組成物が含有する二色性色素は液晶性を示すので、例えば、本発明の組成物を塗布液として調製し、配向膜表面に適用すると、色素分子は配向膜との界面では配向膜のチルト角で配向し、空気との界面では空気界面のチルト角で配向する。色素分子を水平配向させ、且つその配向状態に固定することによって直線偏光膜として利用することができる。
2. Application of Dichroic Dye Composition of the Present Invention The dichroic dye composition of the present invention can be used for various applications. Since it shows a high dichroic ratio, it is preferably used as a material for forming a polarizing film. Hereinafter, the polarizing film formed from the composition of the present invention will be described.
2. -1 Polarizing Film The present invention also relates to a polarizing film formed from the dichroic dye composition of the present invention. The polarizing film of the present invention transmits arbitrary linearly polarized light and absorbs, reflects, or backscatters polarized light whose plane of polarization is orthogonal to the linearly polarized light; and transmits right or left circularly polarized light and spirals the circularly polarized light. May absorb, reflect, or backscatter circularly polarized light in the reverse direction.
Since the dichroic dye contained in the composition of the present invention exhibits liquid crystallinity, for example, when the composition of the present invention is prepared as a coating liquid and applied to the alignment film surface, the dye molecules are aligned at the interface with the alignment film. The film is oriented at the tilt angle of the film, and is oriented at the tilt angle of the air interface at the interface with air. The dye molecules can be used as a linearly polarizing film by horizontally aligning them and fixing them in the aligned state.
 上記組成物から形成される本発明の偏光膜の厚さについては特に制限はないが、一般的には、0.01~2μmであることが好ましく、0.05~2μmであることがさらに好ましい。
 本発明の組成物は高い二色比を示すので、当該組成物からなる本発明の偏光膜は、膜厚が上記範囲であり、比較的薄くても、偏光度85%以上を達成可能である。したがって、特に薄膜化が強く要求される用途、例えば、液晶セル内に配置する偏光層として特に有用である。即ち、セル内に入射した直線偏光が、カラーフィルタ層等のセル内の部材によって偏光解消されて散乱光が生じるのを軽減するのに寄与する偏光層として特に有用である。
The thickness of the polarizing film of the present invention formed from the above composition is not particularly limited, but is generally preferably 0.01 to 2 μm, and more preferably 0.05 to 2 μm. .
Since the composition of the present invention exhibits a high dichroic ratio, the polarizing film of the present invention comprising the composition has a film thickness in the above range, and can achieve a degree of polarization of 85% or more even if it is relatively thin. . Accordingly, it is particularly useful as a polarizing layer disposed in a liquid crystal cell, for example, in applications where thinning is particularly required. That is, it is particularly useful as a polarizing layer that contributes to reducing the generation of scattered light by depolarizing linearly polarized light entering the cell by a member in the cell such as a color filter layer.
 また。本発明の偏光膜は、その表面に透明樹脂硬化層、粘着層、反射防止層等の機能層を有していてもよい。 Also. The polarizing film of the present invention may have functional layers such as a transparent resin cured layer, an adhesive layer, and an antireflection layer on the surface thereof.
2.-2 偏光膜の作製方法
 本発明の偏光膜の製造方法については特に制限はない。一例は、以下の通りである。
[1]基板を直接、又は該基板上に形成された配向膜をラビング、又は光照射する工程
[2]該基板又は該配向膜上に、塗布液として調製された本発明の組成物を塗布して途膜を形成する工程
[3]途膜から溶媒を蒸発させることにより組成物中の色素分子を配向させて偏光膜とする工程
をこの順に含む方法により製造することが好ましい。
2. -2 Production method of polarizing film The production method of the polarizing film of the present invention is not particularly limited. An example is as follows.
[1] Step of rubbing or light-irradiating the alignment film formed on the substrate directly or on the substrate [2] Applying the composition of the present invention prepared as a coating solution on the substrate or the alignment film The step of forming a film [3] It is preferable to produce the film by a method including the step of orienting the dye molecules in the composition by evaporating the solvent from the film to form a polarizing film.
 以下、各工程[1]~[3]にしたがって、説明する。
[1]配向処理工程
 まず、基板の表面又は基板上に形成された配向膜の表面に、配向処理を施す。配向処理には、ラビング処理と、後述する光照射処理がある。
・ラビング処理
 ラビング処理とは、後記詳述するように、当該基板等の表面を、綿布、脱脂綿等のバフにより一定方向に擦って、その方向に平行な微細な溝を形成する配向処理を行う操作である。ラビング処理面に本発明の組成物を塗布することにより、色素分子を最終的にその表面に配向状態で吸着させることができる。
Hereinafter, description will be given according to each step [1] to [3].
[1] Alignment treatment step First, an alignment treatment is performed on the surface of the substrate or the surface of the alignment film formed on the substrate. The alignment process includes a rubbing process and a light irradiation process to be described later.
・ Rubbing treatment As described in detail later, the rubbing treatment is performed by rubbing the surface of the substrate or the like in a certain direction with a buff such as cotton cloth or absorbent cotton to form a fine groove parallel to the direction. It is an operation. By applying the composition of the present invention to the rubbing surface, the dye molecules can be finally adsorbed to the surface in an oriented state.
 ラビング条件、例えばラビング密度等を調整して、所望の配向状態を得ることができる。例えば、ラビング密度と配向膜のプレチルト角との間には、ラビング密度を高くするとプレチルト角は小さくなり、ラビング密度を低くするとプレチルト角は大きくなる関係がある。ラビン密度を変える方法としては、「液晶便覧」(丸善社発行)に記載されている方法を用いることができる。ラビング密度(L)は、下記式(A)で定量化されている。
 式(A) L=Nl(1+2πrn/60v)
 式(A)中、Nはラビング回数、lはラビングローラーの接触長、rはローラーの半径、nはローラーの回転数(rpm)、vはステージ移動速度(秒速)である。
 ラビング密度を高くするためには、ラビング回数を増やす、ラビングローラーの接触長を長く、ローラーの半径を大きく、ローラーの回転数を大きく、ステージ移動速度を遅くすればよく、一方、ラビング密度を低くするためには、この逆にすればよい。
A desired orientation state can be obtained by adjusting the rubbing conditions, for example, the rubbing density. For example, between the rubbing density and the pretilt angle of the alignment film, there is a relationship in which the pretilt angle decreases as the rubbing density increases, and the pretilt angle increases as the rubbing density decreases. As a method for changing the rabin density, a method described in “Liquid Crystal Handbook” (published by Maruzen) can be used. The rubbing density (L) is quantified by the following formula (A).
Formula (A) L = Nl (1 + 2πrn / 60v)
In the formula (A), N is the number of rubbing, l is the contact length of the rubbing roller, r is the radius of the roller, n is the number of rotations (rpm) of the roller, and v is the stage moving speed (second speed).
In order to increase the rubbing density, the rubbing frequency should be increased, the contact length of the rubbing roller should be increased, the radius of the roller should be increased, the rotation speed of the roller should be increased, and the stage moving speed should be decreased, while the rubbing density should be decreased. To do this, you can do the reverse.
・光照射
 上記[1]の他の例は、基板上に形成した光配向材料からなる膜に直線偏光又は非偏光照射を施し、光配向膜とする工程である。
 直線偏光照射とは、前記光配向材料に光反応を生じせしめるための操作である。照射する光の波長は、用いる光配向材料により異なり、その光反応に必要な波長であれば特に限定されるものではない。好ましくは、光照射に用いる光のピーク波長が200nm~700nmであり、より好ましくは光のピーク波長が400nm以下の紫外光である。
-Light irradiation Another example of the above [1] is a step of applying a linearly polarized light or a non-polarized light to a film made of a photoalignment material formed on a substrate to form a photoalignment film.
The linearly polarized light irradiation is an operation for causing a photoreaction in the photo-alignment material. The wavelength of the light to be irradiated varies depending on the photo-alignment material used, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a wavelength necessary for the photoreaction. Preferably, the peak wavelength of light used for light irradiation is 200 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably ultraviolet light having a peak wavelength of light of 400 nm or less.
 光照射に用いる光源は、通常使われる光源、例えばタングステンランプ、ハロゲンランプ、キセノンランプ、キセノンフラッシュランプ、水銀ランプ、水銀キセノンランプ、カーボンアークランプ等のランプ、各種のレーザー(例、半導体レーザー、ヘリウムネオンレーザー、アルゴンイオンレーザー、ヘリウムカドミウムレーザー、YAGレーザー)、発光ダイオード、陰極線管などを挙げることができる。 The light source used for light irradiation is a commonly used light source such as a tungsten lamp, a halogen lamp, a xenon lamp, a xenon flash lamp, a mercury lamp, a mercury xenon lamp, a carbon arc lamp, or various lasers (eg, semiconductor laser, helium). Neon laser, argon ion laser, helium cadmium laser, YAG laser), light emitting diode, cathode ray tube, and the like.
 直線偏光を得る手段としては、偏光板(例、ヨウ素偏光板、二色色素偏光板、ワイヤーグリッド偏光板)を用いる方法、プリズム系素子(例、グラントムソンプリズム)やブリュースター角を利用した反射型偏光膜を用いる方法、又は偏光を有するレーザー光源から出射される光を用いる方法が採用できる。また、フィルターや波長変換素子等を用いて必要とする波長の光のみを選択的に照射してもよい。 As means for obtaining linearly polarized light, a method using a polarizing plate (eg, iodine polarizing plate, dichroic dye polarizing plate, wire grid polarizing plate), reflection using a prism-based element (eg, Glan-Thompson prism) or Brewster angle A method using a polarizing film or a method using light emitted from a polarized laser light source can be employed. Moreover, you may selectively irradiate only the light of the required wavelength using a filter, a wavelength conversion element, etc.
 照射する光は、直線偏光の場合、膜表面に対して上面もしくは裏面から、膜表面に対して垂直又は斜めから光を照射する方法が採用される。前記光の入射角度は、前記光配向材料によって異なるが、例えば、0~90°(垂直)、好ましくは40~90である。
 非偏光を照射する態様では、斜めから光を照射する方法が採用され、その入射角度は、10~80°、好ましくは20~60、特に好ましくは30~50°である。
 照射時間は好ましくは1分~60分、さらに好ましくは1分~10分である。
In the case of linearly polarized light, a method of irradiating light from the top surface or the back surface with respect to the film surface and from a direction perpendicular or oblique to the film surface is employed. The incident angle of the light varies depending on the photo-alignment material, but is, for example, 0 to 90 ° (vertical), preferably 40 to 90.
In the mode of irradiating non-polarized light, a method of irradiating light from an oblique direction is adopted, and the incident angle is 10 to 80 °, preferably 20 to 60, and particularly preferably 30 to 50 °.
The irradiation time is preferably 1 minute to 60 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes.
 なお、パターン化が必要な場合には、フォトマスクを用いた光照射をパターン作成に必要な回数施す方法や、レーザー光走査によるパターンの書き込みによる方法を採用できる。 When patterning is necessary, a method of performing light irradiation using a photomask as many times as necessary for pattern creation or a method of writing a pattern by laser beam scanning can be employed.
[2]塗布工程
 上記配向処理を施した基板又は配向膜の表面に、塗布液として調製した本発明の組成物を塗布する工程である。
 前記塗布液の調製に使用する溶媒としては、有機溶媒が好ましい。有機溶媒の例には、アミド(例、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド)、スルホキシド(例、ジメチルスルホキシド)、ヘテロ環化合物(例、ピリジン)、炭化水素(例、ベンゼン、トルエン、ヘキサン)、アルキルハライド(例、クロロホルム、ジクロロメタン)、エステル(例、酢酸メチル、酢酸ブチル)、ケトン(例、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン)、エーテル(例、テトラヒドロフラン、1,2-ジメトキシエタン)が含まれる。炭化水素、アルキルハライド及びケトンが好ましい。2種類以上の有機溶媒を併用してもよい。
[2] Coating step This is a step of coating the composition of the present invention prepared as a coating solution on the surface of the substrate or alignment film subjected to the alignment treatment.
As a solvent used for the preparation of the coating solution, an organic solvent is preferable. Examples of organic solvents include amides (eg, N, N-dimethylformamide), sulfoxides (eg, dimethyl sulfoxide), heterocyclic compounds (eg, pyridine), hydrocarbons (eg, benzene, toluene, hexane), alkyl halides (Eg, chloroform, dichloromethane), esters (eg, methyl acetate, butyl acetate), ketones (eg, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone), ethers (eg, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane). Hydrocarbons, alkyl halides and ketones are preferred. Two or more organic solvents may be used in combination.
 前記塗布液の塗布方法については特に制限はない。湿式成膜法を利用するのが好ましい。湿式成膜法としては、原崎勇次著「コーティング工学」株式会社朝倉書店、1971年3月20日発行、253頁から277頁や市村國宏監修「分子協調材料の創製と応用」株式会社シーエムシー出版、1998年3月3日発行、118頁から149頁などに記載の公知の方法が挙げられる。また、例えば、通常の塗布方法(例えば、スピンコーティング法、スプレーコーティング法、スリットコーティング法、スリットアンドスピン法、ワイヤバーコーティング法、ロールコーティング法、ブレードコーティング法、フリースパンコーティング法、押し出しコーティング法、ダイレクトグラビアコーティング法、リバースグラビアコーティング法、ダイコーティング法、インクジェット法)により実施できる。中でも、本発明においては、配向の均一性及び組成物の使用効率の点からは、スリットコーティング法を利用するのが好ましい。以下、スリットコーティング法を例に挙げて説明する。 There is no particular limitation on the coating method of the coating solution. It is preferable to use a wet film forming method. Wet deposition methods include Yuji Harasaki, “Coating Engineering”, Asakura Shoten Co., Ltd., published on March 20, 1971, pages 253-277 and “Creation and Application of Molecular Cooperative Materials” supervised by Kunihiro Ichimura, CMC Co., Ltd. Publicly known methods described in Publication, published on March 3, 1998, pages 118 to 149, and the like. In addition, for example, a normal coating method (for example, spin coating method, spray coating method, slit coating method, slit and spin method, wire bar coating method, roll coating method, blade coating method, free span coating method, extrusion coating method, (Direct gravure coating method, reverse gravure coating method, die coating method, ink jet method). Among them, in the present invention, it is preferable to use a slit coating method from the viewpoint of uniformity of alignment and use efficiency of the composition. Hereinafter, the slit coating method will be described as an example.
スリットコーティング法:
 スリットコーティング法の一例は、以下の通りである。基板(例えば、何れか一辺の長さが800mm以上の基板)に、当該基板との相対移動速度が50~150mm/secの流延塗布機のスリットダイから、本発明の組成物の塗布液を塗布して、前記基板表面に膜厚L1のウェット塗膜を形成する。その後、必要な場合、ウエット塗膜に対してプリベークを行って溶媒を除去して膜厚L2のプリベーク塗膜を形成する。このとき、前記ウエット塗膜の膜厚L1は0.1~20μmであることが好ましく、且つ、ドライ塗膜の膜厚L2は0.01~2μmであることが好ましい。また、前記スリットダイの吐出口と基板表面とのギャップは50μm~200μmの範囲である。
 前記方法によって、本発明の組成物の塗布液を塗布すれば、例えば、第五世代のガラス基板(1100mm×1250mm)表面に塗布する場合においても、配向均一性の高い偏光膜を生産性よく形成することができる。
Slit coating method:
An example of the slit coating method is as follows. A coating liquid of the composition of the present invention is applied to a substrate (for example, a substrate having a length of 800 mm or more on one side) from a slit die of a cast coating machine having a relative moving speed of 50 to 150 mm / sec with the substrate. coating to form a wet coating film having a thickness L 1 on the substrate surface. Then, if necessary, the solvent is removed to form a pre-baked coating film having a thickness of L 2 and prebaked against wet film. At this time, the film thickness L 1 of the wet coating film is preferably 0.1 to 20 μm, and the film thickness L 2 of the dry coating film is preferably 0.01 to 2 μm. The gap between the discharge port of the slit die and the substrate surface is in the range of 50 μm to 200 μm.
By applying the coating solution of the composition of the present invention by the above method, a polarizing film having high alignment uniformity can be formed with high productivity even when applied to the surface of a fifth generation glass substrate (1100 mm × 1250 mm), for example. can do.
 塗布時の温度は、好ましくは0℃以上、80℃以下、湿度は好ましくは10%RH以上、80%RH以下程度である。 The temperature at the time of application is preferably 0 ° C. or more and 80 ° C. or less, and the humidity is preferably about 10% RH or more and 80% RH or less.
 また、湿式製膜法により、本発明の組成物の塗布液を塗布する場合には、基板を加温してもよいし冷却してもよい。このときの基板の温度は、好ましくは10℃以上60℃以下である。上限を上回ると、以下詳述する減圧乾燥を行う前に配向が乱れて乾燥する恐れがあり、下限を下回ると支持体表面に水滴が付き塗布の障害になる恐れがある。湿式製膜法により塗布した偏光膜を減圧乾燥するときに基板の加温を行ってもよい。このときの基板の温度は、好ましくは60℃以下である。上限を上回ると減圧乾燥を行う前に配向が乱れて乾燥する恐れがある。 In addition, when the coating liquid of the composition of the present invention is applied by a wet film forming method, the substrate may be heated or cooled. The temperature of the substrate at this time is preferably 10 ° C. or higher and 60 ° C. or lower. If the upper limit is exceeded, the orientation may be disturbed before drying under reduced pressure, which will be described in detail below, and if it is lower than the lower limit, water droplets may form on the surface of the support, which may hinder coating. The substrate may be heated when the polarizing film applied by the wet film forming method is dried under reduced pressure. The temperature of the substrate at this time is preferably 60 ° C. or lower. If the upper limit is exceeded, the orientation may be disturbed before drying under reduced pressure.
 上記方法では、一方向に配向処理された基板又は配向膜上に、前記基板又は配向膜上の配向処理方向に対して平行でない角度で色素組成物を塗布して、偏光膜を形成することができる。さらに、基板の縦又は横方向と略一致する方向に色素組成物を塗布することがより好ましい。これにより、配向欠陥がなく高い偏光度を持つ偏光膜を形成することもできる。また、色素組成物の塗布後、必要な偏光角度を持たせるために基板を切り出す必要がなく、生産性が高い。 In the above method, a polarizing film may be formed by applying a dye composition on a substrate or alignment film subjected to alignment treatment in one direction at an angle not parallel to the alignment treatment direction on the substrate or alignment film. it can. Furthermore, it is more preferable to apply the dye composition in a direction substantially coinciding with the vertical or horizontal direction of the substrate. Thereby, a polarizing film having no alignment defect and a high degree of polarization can be formed. In addition, after applying the dye composition, it is not necessary to cut out the substrate in order to give the necessary polarization angle, and the productivity is high.
[3]乾燥、配向工程
 上記[2]塗布工程に引き続き、[2]塗布工程によって形成された塗膜から、溶媒を蒸発させることにより、色素分子を配向させる工程を実施する。
 この場合、乾燥温度としては、好ましくは室温において自然乾燥することであり、塗布により形成された色素分子の配向状態を乱さない(熱緩和等を避ける)ようにするが好ましい。なお、減圧処理において、溶媒を蒸発させ、より低温で乾燥することも好ましい。
 ここでいう減圧処理とは、塗膜(偏光膜)を有する基板を減圧条件下におき、溶媒を蒸発除去することを言う。このとき、偏光膜を有する基板は高部から底部に流れないよう、水平にしておくことが好ましい。塗布後、偏光膜の減圧処理を始めるまでの時間は、短ければ短いほどよく、好ましくは1秒以上30秒以内である。
[3] Drying and orientation step Following the above [2] coating step, a step of orienting the dye molecules is carried out by evaporating the solvent from the coating film formed by the [2] coating step.
In this case, the drying temperature is preferably natural drying at room temperature, and it is preferable not to disturb the alignment state of the dye molecules formed by coating (avoid thermal relaxation or the like). In the pressure reduction treatment, it is also preferable to evaporate the solvent and dry at a lower temperature.
The decompression treatment here refers to removing a solvent by evaporating a substrate having a coating film (polarizing film) under reduced pressure conditions. At this time, it is preferable that the substrate having the polarizing film be kept horizontal so that it does not flow from the high part to the bottom part. The shorter the time from the start of application to the pressure reduction treatment of the polarizing film, the better. The time is preferably from 1 second to 30 seconds.
 減圧処理の方法としては、例えば以下の様な方法が挙げられる。塗布液を塗布して得られた偏光膜を、その基板とともに減圧処理装置に入れて減圧処理する。例えば特開2006-201759号公報の図9や図10のような減圧処理装置を使用することができる。減圧処理装置の詳細については、特開2004-169975号公報に記載されている。 As the decompression method, for example, the following methods can be mentioned. The polarizing film obtained by applying the coating liquid is put into a reduced pressure processing apparatus together with the substrate and subjected to a reduced pressure process. For example, a decompression processing apparatus as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of JP-A-2006-201759 can be used. Details of the decompression processing apparatus are described in JP-A No. 2004-169975.
 減圧処理の条件としては、偏光膜の存在する系内の圧力が、好ましくは2×104Pa以下、さらに好ましくは1×104Pa以下、特に好ましくは1×103Pa以下である。また、好ましくは1Pa以上、更に好ましくは1×101Pa以上である。通常、系内が最終的に到達する圧力が前記の通りであることが好ましい。上限を上回ると乾燥できず配向が乱れる恐れがあり、下限を下回ると乾燥が急速過ぎて欠陥が発生する恐れがある。
 また、減圧処理時間は、好ましくは5秒以上180秒以内である。上限を上回ると配向緩和前に急速に偏光膜を乾燥できず配向が乱れる恐れがあり、下限を下回ると乾燥できず配向が乱れる恐れがある。
 また、減圧処理する際の系内の温度は、好ましくは10℃以上60℃以下である。上限を上回ると乾燥時に対流が起こり偏光膜に不均一性の発生の恐れがあり、下限を下回ると乾燥できず配向が乱れる恐れがある。
As the conditions for the decompression treatment, the pressure in the system where the polarizing film is present is preferably 2 × 10 4 Pa or less, more preferably 1 × 10 4 Pa or less, and particularly preferably 1 × 10 3 Pa or less. Further, it is preferably 1 Pa or more, more preferably 1 × 10 1 Pa or more. Usually, the pressure finally reached in the system is preferably as described above. If the upper limit is exceeded, drying may not be possible and the orientation may be disturbed. If the lower limit is not reached, drying may be too rapid and defects may occur.
The decompression time is preferably 5 seconds or more and 180 seconds or less. If the upper limit is exceeded, the polarizing film cannot be dried rapidly before orientation relaxation, and the orientation may be disturbed. If the lower limit is not reached, drying may not be possible and the orientation may be disturbed.
Further, the temperature in the system during the decompression treatment is preferably 10 ° C. or more and 60 ° C. or less. If the upper limit is exceeded, convection may occur during drying and non-uniformity may occur in the polarizing film, and if the lower limit is not reached, drying may not be possible and orientation may be disturbed.
 また、前記途膜を乾燥して溶媒を除去した後に、色素分子を配向させるとき、配向を促進させるために基板を加温してもよい。このときの基板の温度は、好ましくは50℃以上200℃以下であり、特に好ましくは70℃以上180℃以下である。この配向温度を低下させるために、色素組成物に可塑剤等の添加剤を併用してもよい。 In addition, when the dye molecules are aligned after drying the film and removing the solvent, the substrate may be heated in order to promote the alignment. The temperature of the substrate at this time is preferably 50 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 70 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C. or lower. In order to lower the orientation temperature, an additive such as a plasticizer may be used in combination with the dye composition.
[4] 硬化工程
 [3]乾燥、配向工程を行うことによって、偏光膜が得られるが、さらに硬化工程を実施すると、膜強度が改善されるので好ましい。
 例えば、前記組成物が、非液晶性の重合性多官能モノマーを含む態様では、該色素を配向させた後、光照射(好ましくは紫外線照射)又は加熱、或いはこれらの組合せにより重合硬化を行なうことが好ましい。
[4] Curing step [3] A polarizing film can be obtained by carrying out drying and orientation steps, but it is preferable to further carry out the curing step because the film strength is improved.
For example, in an embodiment in which the composition contains a non-liquid crystalline polymerizable polyfunctional monomer, the dye is oriented, and then polymerized and cured by light irradiation (preferably ultraviolet irradiation) or heating, or a combination thereof. Is preferred.
[5]機能層等の付加工程
 以上の[1]~[3]、及び所望により[4]を実施することで、本発明の偏光膜を形成することができる。
 さらに偏光膜の表面に透明樹脂硬化層、粘着層、反射防止層等を形成してもよい。
 透明樹脂硬化層は、硬化性透明樹脂組成物の塗布液を、偏光膜表面に塗布し、硬化させることで形成できる。前記塗布液の調製に用いる塗布溶媒としては、沸点が60~170℃の液体を用いることが好ましい。具体的には、水、アルコール(例、メタノール、エタノール、イソプロパノール、ブタノール、ベンジルアルコール)、ケトン(例、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン)、エステル(例、酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル、酢酸プロピル、酢酸ブチル、蟻酸メチル、蟻酸エチル、蟻酸プロピル、蟻酸ブチル)、脂肪族炭化水素(例、ヘキサン、シクロヘキサン)、ハロゲン化炭化水素(例、メチレンクロライド、クロロホルム、四塩化炭素)、芳香族炭化水素(例、ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン)、アミド(例、ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルアセトアミド、n-メチルピロリドン)、エーテル(例、ジエチルエーテル、ジオキサン、テトラハイドロフラン)、エーテルアルコール(例、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール)等が挙げられる。中でもトルエン、キシレン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、エタノール及びブタノールが好ましく、特に好ましい分散媒体は、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、エタノールである。
 上記溶媒の使用量は、硬化性透明樹脂組成物の固形分濃度が2~50質量%となるように使用するのが好ましく、3~40質量%となるように使用するのが更に好ましい。
 上記、硬化性透明樹脂組成物の塗布液の塗布は、前記偏光膜の塗布方法を採用することができる。
[5] Step of adding functional layer, etc. The polarizing film of the present invention can be formed by carrying out the above [1] to [3] and optionally [4].
Further, a transparent resin cured layer, an adhesive layer, an antireflection layer, or the like may be formed on the surface of the polarizing film.
The transparent resin cured layer can be formed by applying a coating liquid of the curable transparent resin composition on the surface of the polarizing film and curing it. As a coating solvent used for preparing the coating solution, a liquid having a boiling point of 60 to 170 ° C. is preferably used. Specifically, water, alcohol (eg, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, butanol, benzyl alcohol), ketone (eg, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone), ester (eg, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate) , Butyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl formate, propyl formate, butyl formate), aliphatic hydrocarbons (eg, hexane, cyclohexane), halogenated hydrocarbons (eg, methylene chloride, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride), aromatic hydrocarbons (Eg, benzene, toluene, xylene), amide (eg, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, n-methylpyrrolidone), ether (eg, diethyl ether, dioxane, tetrahydrofuran), ether alcohol (eg, 1-methoxy) 2-propanol) and the like. Of these, toluene, xylene, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, ethanol and butanol are preferred, and particularly preferred dispersion media are methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone and ethanol.
The amount of the solvent used is preferably such that the solid content concentration of the curable transparent resin composition is 2 to 50% by mass, and more preferably 3 to 40% by mass.
The application method of the polarizing film can be used for the application of the coating liquid of the curable transparent resin composition.
 次に、塗膜を硬化させて、透明樹脂硬化層を形成する。硬化は、紫外線照射によって行なうことが好ましい。 Next, the coating film is cured to form a transparent resin cured layer. Curing is preferably performed by ultraviolet irradiation.
2.-3 偏光膜の作製に利用される材料
 次に、上記方法によりされる配向膜等、偏光膜以外の材料について説明する。
配向膜:
 本発明の偏光膜の作製に利用可能な配向膜は、当該配向膜上に設けられる色素分子に所望の配向を付与できるのであれば、どのような層でもよい。例えば、有機化合物(好ましくはポリマー)のラビング処理、無機化合物の斜方蒸着、マイクログルーブを有する層の形成、あるいはラングミュア・ブロジェット法(LB膜)による有機化合物(例、ω-トリコサン酸、ジオクタデシルメチルアンモニウムクロライド、ステアリル酸メチル)の累積のような手段で、設けることができる。さらに、電場の付与、磁場の付与あるいは光照射により、配向機能が生じる配向膜も知られている。中でも、配向膜のプレチルト角の制御し易さの点からは、高分子膜の表面をラビング処理することにより形成される配向膜が好ましく、また、配向の均一性の点からは、光配向材料の膜に光照射することにより形成される光配向膜が好ましい。
2. -3 Materials Used for Production of Polarizing Film Next, materials other than the polarizing film such as the alignment film obtained by the above method will be described.
Alignment film:
The orientation film that can be used for the production of the polarizing film of the present invention may be any layer as long as it can impart a desired orientation to the dye molecules provided on the orientation film. For example, rubbing treatment of an organic compound (preferably a polymer), oblique deposition of an inorganic compound, formation of a layer having a microgroove, or an organic compound (eg, ω-tricosanoic acid, disilane) by the Langmuir-Blodgett method (LB film) It can be provided by means such as the accumulation of octadecylmethylammonium chloride, methyl stearylate). Furthermore, an alignment film in which an alignment function is generated by application of an electric field, application of a magnetic field, or light irradiation is also known. Among these, from the viewpoint of easy control of the pretilt angle of the alignment film, an alignment film formed by rubbing the surface of the polymer film is preferable, and from the viewpoint of alignment uniformity, a photo-alignment material A photo-alignment film formed by irradiating the film with light is preferable.
 ラビング処理により形成される配向膜に用いられるポリマーとしては、多数の文献に記載があり、多数の市販品を入手することができる。例えば、ポリビニルアルコール又はポリイミド、及びその誘導体が好ましく用いられる。配向膜についてはWO01/88574A1号公報の43頁24行~49頁8行の記載を参照することができる。
 配向膜の厚さは、0.01~10μmであることが好ましく、0.01~1μmであることがさらに好ましい。
As a polymer used for the alignment film formed by the rubbing treatment, there are many literatures, and many commercially available products can be obtained. For example, polyvinyl alcohol or polyimide and derivatives thereof are preferably used. For the alignment film, reference can be made to the description on page 43, line 24 to page 49, line 8 of WO01 / 88574A1.
The thickness of the alignment film is preferably 0.01 to 10 μm, and more preferably 0.01 to 1 μm.
 光照射により形成される配向膜に用いられる光配向材料としては、多数の文献等に記載がある。具体的には、特開2006-285197号公報、特開2007-76839号公報、特開2007-138138号公報、特開2007-94071号公報、特開2007-121721号公報、特開2007-140465号公報、特開2007-156439号公報、特開2007-133184号公報、特開2009-109831号公報、特許第3883848号、特許第4151746号に記載のアゾ化合物;特開2002-229039号公報に記載の芳香族エステル化合物;特開2002-265541号公報、特開2002-317013号公報に記載の光配向性単位を有するマレイミド及び/又はアルケニル置換ナジイミド化合物;特許第4205195号、特許第4205198号に記載の光架橋性シラン誘導体;特表2003-520878号公報、特表2004-529220号公報、特許第4162850号に記載の光架橋性ポリイミド、ポリアミド、又はエステル;が好ましい例として挙げられる。特に好ましくは、アゾ化合物、光架橋性ポリイミド、ポリアミド、又はエステルである。 As a photo-alignment material used for an alignment film formed by light irradiation, there are many references. Specifically, JP-A-2006-285197, JP-A-2007-76839, JP-A-2007-138138, JP-A-2007-94071, JP-A-2007-121721, JP-A-2007-140465. Azo compounds described in JP-A No. 2007-156439, JP-A No. 2007-133184, JP-A No. 2009-109831, JP-A No. 3888848, and JP-A No. 4151746; Aromatic ester compounds described; maleimide and / or alkenyl-substituted nadiimide compounds having a photoalignment unit described in JP-A Nos. 2002-265541 and 2002-31703; Patents 4205195 and 4205198 The photocrosslinkable silane derivative described above; It is mentioned as examples are preferred; 2003-520878, JP-T-2004-529220, JP-photocrosslinkable polyimide, polyamide, or esters described in Japanese Patent No. 4162850. Particularly preferred are azo compounds, photocrosslinkable polyimides, polyamides, or esters.
透明樹脂硬化層:
 上記した通り、本発明の偏光膜は、その表面に透明樹脂硬化層を有していてもよい。該層は、偏光膜に物理強度、耐久性、又は、光学特性を付与するために、設けられる。透明樹脂硬化層の層厚は1~30μmの範囲にあることが好ましく、1~10μmであることが特に好ましい。
 透明樹脂硬化層は、電離放射線硬化性化合物の架橋反応、又は、重合反応により形成されることが好ましい。本発明における透明樹脂硬化層は、電離放射線硬化性の多官能モノマーや多官能オリゴマーを含む塗布組成物を偏光子の表面に塗布し、多官能モノマーや多官能オリゴマーを架橋反応、又は、重合反応させることにより形成することができる。
 電離放射線硬化性の多官能モノマーや多官能オリゴマーの官能基としては、光、電子線、放射線重合性のものが好ましく、中でも光重合性官能基が好ましい。
 光重合性官能基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニル基、スチリル基、アリル基等の不飽和の重合性官能基等が挙げられ、中でも、(メタ)アクリロイル基が好ましい。また、無機微粒子を含有することもできる。
Transparent resin cured layer:
As described above, the polarizing film of the present invention may have a transparent resin cured layer on the surface thereof. This layer is provided in order to impart physical strength, durability, or optical properties to the polarizing film. The thickness of the transparent resin cured layer is preferably in the range of 1 to 30 μm, and particularly preferably 1 to 10 μm.
The transparent resin cured layer is preferably formed by a crosslinking reaction or a polymerization reaction of an ionizing radiation curable compound. The transparent resin cured layer in the present invention is obtained by applying a coating composition containing an ionizing radiation curable polyfunctional monomer or polyfunctional oligomer on the surface of the polarizer, and crosslinking reaction or polymerization reaction of the polyfunctional monomer or polyfunctional oligomer. Can be formed.
The functional group of the ionizing radiation-curable polyfunctional monomer or polyfunctional oligomer is preferably a light, electron beam, or radiation polymerizable group, and among them, a photopolymerizable functional group is preferable.
Examples of the photopolymerizable functional group include unsaturated polymerizable functional groups such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, a styryl group, and an allyl group. Among them, a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable. Moreover, inorganic fine particles can also be contained.
 光重合性官能基を有する光重合性多官能モノマーの具体例としては、
 ネオペンチルグリコールアクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオール(メタ)アクリレート、プロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート等のアルキレングリコールの(メタ)アクリル酸ジエステル類;
 トリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ジプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート等のポリオキシアルキレングリコールの(メタ)アクリル酸ジエステル類;
 ペンタエリスリトールジ(メタ)アクリレート等の多価アルコールの(メタ)アクリル酸ジエステル類;
 2,2-ビス{4-(アクリロキシ・ジエトキシ)フェニル}プロパン、2-2-ビス{4-(アクリロキシ・ポリプロポキシ)フェニル}プロパン等のエチレンオキシドあるいはプロピレンオキシド付加物の(メタ)アクリル酸ジエステル類;
等を挙げることができる。
 さらにはエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート類、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート類、ポリエステル(メタ)アクリレート類も、光重合性多官能モノマーとして、好ましく用いられる。
As a specific example of a photopolymerizable polyfunctional monomer having a photopolymerizable functional group,
(Meth) acrylic acid diesters of alkylene glycol such as neopentyl glycol acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol (meth) acrylate, propylene glycol di (meth) acrylate;
(Meth) acrylic acid diesters of polyoxyalkylene glycols such as triethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, dipropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate;
(Meth) acrylic acid diesters of polyhydric alcohols such as pentaerythritol di (meth) acrylate;
(Meth) acrylic acid diesters of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide adducts such as 2,2-bis {4- (acryloxy-diethoxy) phenyl} propane and 2-2bis {4- (acryloxy-polypropoxy) phenyl} propane ;
Etc.
Furthermore, epoxy (meth) acrylates, urethane (meth) acrylates, and polyester (meth) acrylates are also preferably used as the photopolymerizable polyfunctional monomer.
 中でも、多価アルコールと(メタ)アクリル酸とのエステル類が好ましい。さらに好ましくは、1分子中に3個以上の(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する多官能モノマーが好ましい。具体的には、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、1,2,4-シクロヘキサンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタグリセロールトリアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールヘキサトリアクリレート等が挙げられる。多官能モノマーは、二種類以上を併用してもよい。 Of these, esters of polyhydric alcohol and (meth) acrylic acid are preferred. More preferably, a polyfunctional monomer having 3 or more (meth) acryloyl groups in one molecule is preferable. Specifically, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane tri (meth) acrylate, 1,2,4-cyclohexanetetra (meth) acrylate, pentaglycerol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, penta Erythritol tri (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol triacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, tripentaerythritol triacrylate, tripentaerythritol hexatriacrylate, etc. Is mentioned. Two or more polyfunctional monomers may be used in combination.
 上記透明樹脂硬化層の形成に用いられる重合開始剤としては、光重合開始剤が好ましい。光重合開始剤としては、光ラジカル重合開始剤と光カチオン重合開始剤が好ましく、特に好ましいのは光ラジカル重合開始剤である。
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、アセトフェノン類、ベンゾフェノン類、ミヒラーのベンゾイルベンゾエート、α-アミロキシムエステル、テトラメチルチウラムモノサルファイド及びチオキサントン類等が挙げられる。
 市販の光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、日本化薬(株)製のカヤキュア(DETX-S,BP-100,BDMK,CTX,BMS,2-EAQ,ABQ,CPTX,EPD,ITX,QTX,BTC,MCAなど、いずれも商品名)、チバ・スペシャルティ・ケミカルズ(株)製のイルガキュア(651,184,127,500,907,369,1173,2959,4265,4263など、いずれも商品名)、サートマー社製のEsacure(KIP100F,KB1,EB3,BP,X33,KT046,KT37,KIP150,TZT、いずれも商品名)等が挙げられる。
As a polymerization initiator used for formation of the said transparent resin cured layer, a photoinitiator is preferable. As the photopolymerization initiator, a photoradical polymerization initiator and a photocationic polymerization initiator are preferable, and a photoradical polymerization initiator is particularly preferable.
Examples of the photo radical polymerization initiator include acetophenones, benzophenones, Michler's benzoylbenzoate, α-amyloxime ester, tetramethylthiuram monosulfide, and thioxanthones.
Commercially available photo radical polymerization initiators include Kayacure (DETX-S, BP-100, BDDK, CTX, BMS, 2-EAQ, ABQ, CPTX, EPD, ITX, QTX, BTC, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. MCA, etc., all trade names), Irgacure (651, 184, 127, 500, 907, 369, 1173, 2959, 4265, 4263 etc., all trade names) manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd., Sartomer Examples include Esacure (KIP100F, KB1, EB3, BP, X33, KT046, KT37, KIP150, TZT, all of which are trade names).
 特に、光開裂型の光ラジカル重合開始剤が好ましい。光開裂型の光ラジカル重合開始剤については、最新UV硬化技術(P.159,発行人;高薄一弘,発行所;(株)技術情報協会,1991年発行)に記載されている。
 市販の光開裂型の光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、チバ・スペシャルティ・ケミカルズ(株)製のイルガキュア(651,184,127,907、いずれも商品名)等が挙げられる。
In particular, photocleavable photoradical polymerization initiators are preferred. The photocleavable photoradical polymerization initiator is described in the latest UV curing technology (P.159, issuer; Kazuhiro Takasawa, publisher; Technical Information Association, published in 1991).
Examples of commercially available photocleavable photoradical polymerization initiators include Irgacure (651, 184, 127, 907, trade names) manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals.
 光重合開始剤は、硬化性樹脂100質量部に対して、0.1~15質量部の範囲で使用することが好ましく、より好ましくは1~10質量部の範囲である。
 光重合開始剤に加えて、光増感剤を用いてもよい。光増感剤の具体例として、n-ブチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、トリ-n-ブチルホスフィン、ミヒラーのケトン及びチオキサントンを挙げることができる。
 市販の光増感剤としては、日本化薬(株)製のKAYACURE(DMBI,EPA、いずれも商品名)などが挙げられる。
 光重合反応は、高屈折率層の塗布及び乾燥後、紫外線照射により硬化反応させることが好ましい。
The photopolymerization initiator is preferably used in the range of 0.1 to 15 parts by mass, more preferably in the range of 1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the curable resin.
In addition to the photopolymerization initiator, a photosensitizer may be used. Specific examples of the photosensitizer include n-butylamine, triethylamine, tri-n-butylphosphine, Michler's ketone and thioxanthone.
Examples of commercially available photosensitizers include KAYACURE (DMBI, EPA, both trade names) manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
The photopolymerization reaction is preferably carried out by UV irradiation after the application of the high refractive index layer and drying.
 前記透明樹脂硬化層は、脆性の付与のために質量平均分子量が500以上のオリゴマー又はポリマー、あるいは両者を添加してもよい。
 オリゴマー、ポリマーとしては、(メタ)アクリレート系、セルロース系、スチレン系の重合体や、ウレタンアクリレート、ポリエステルアクリレート等が挙げられる。好ましくは、側鎖に官能基を有するポリ(グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート)やポリ(アリル(メタ)アクリレート)等が挙げられる。
The transparent resin cured layer may be added with an oligomer or polymer having a mass average molecular weight of 500 or more, or both for imparting brittleness.
Examples of the oligomer and polymer include (meth) acrylate-based, cellulose-based, and styrene-based polymers, urethane acrylate, and polyester acrylate. Preferable examples include poly (glycidyl (meth) acrylate) and poly (allyl (meth) acrylate) having a functional group in the side chain.
 前記透明樹脂硬化層中のオリゴマー及びポリマーの合計量は、樹脂層の全質量に対し5~80質量%であることが好ましく、より好ましくは25~70質量%、特に好ましくは35~65質量%である。 The total amount of oligomer and polymer in the transparent resin cured layer is preferably 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably 25 to 70% by mass, and particularly preferably 35 to 65% by mass with respect to the total mass of the resin layer. It is.
 前記透明樹脂硬化層の強度は、JIS K5400に従う鉛筆硬度試験で、H以上であることが好ましく、2H以上であることがさらに好ましく、3H以上であることが最も好ましい。
 また、JIS K5400に従うテーバー試験で、試験前後の試験片の摩耗量が少ないほど好ましい。
 透明樹脂硬化層の形成において、電離放射線硬化性化合物の架橋反応、又は、重合反応により形成される場合、架橋反応、又は、重合反応は酸素濃度が10体積%以下の雰囲気で実施することが好ましい。酸素濃度が10体積%以下の雰囲気で形成することにより、物理強度や耐久性に優れた透明樹脂硬化層を形成することができ、好ましい。
 好ましくは酸素濃度が6体積%以下の雰囲気で電離放射線硬化性化合物の架橋反応、又は、重合反応により形成することであり、更に好ましくは酸素濃度が4体積%以下、特に好ましくは酸素濃度が2体積%以下、最も好ましくは1体積%以下である。酸素濃度を10体積%以下にする手法としては、大気(窒素濃度約79体積%、酸素濃度約21体積%)を別の気体で置換することが好ましく、特に好ましくは窒素で置換(窒素パージ)することである。
The strength of the transparent resin cured layer is preferably H or more, more preferably 2H or more, and most preferably 3H or more in a pencil hardness test according to JIS K5400.
Further, in the Taber test according to JIS K5400, the smaller the wear amount of the test piece before and after the test, the better.
In the formation of the transparent resin cured layer, when the ionizing radiation curable compound is formed by a crosslinking reaction or a polymerization reaction, the crosslinking reaction or the polymerization reaction is preferably performed in an atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 10% by volume or less. . By forming in an atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 10% by volume or less, a transparent resin cured layer excellent in physical strength and durability can be formed, which is preferable.
Preferably, it is formed by a crosslinking reaction or polymerization reaction of an ionizing radiation curable compound in an atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 6% by volume or less, more preferably an oxygen concentration of 4% by volume or less, particularly preferably an oxygen concentration of 2 Volume% or less, most preferably 1 volume% or less. As a method of reducing the oxygen concentration to 10% by volume or less, it is preferable to replace the atmosphere (nitrogen concentration of about 79% by volume, oxygen concentration of about 21% by volume) with another gas, particularly preferably replacement with nitrogen (nitrogen purge). It is to be.
基板:
 本発明の偏光膜は、基板上に形成されてもよい。
 基板としては、例えば、液晶表示素子、OLED素子等に用いられる無アルカリガラス、ソーダガラス、パイレックス(登録商標)ガラス、石英ガラス、固体撮像素子等に用いられる光電変換素子基板、例えば、シリコン基板等、並びにプラスチック基板、及びこれらに透明導電膜、カラーフィルター膜、電極、TFTを付着させたものが挙げられる。これらの基板上には、通常、各画素を隔離するブラックマトリクスが形成されていたり、密着促進等のために透明樹脂層を設けたりしていてもよい。
 プラスチック基板には、その表面にガスバリヤー層及び/又は耐溶剤性層を有していることも好ましい。
substrate:
The polarizing film of the present invention may be formed on a substrate.
As the substrate, for example, a non-alkali glass, soda glass, pyrex (registered trademark) glass, quartz glass, a solid-state image sensor used for a liquid crystal display element, an OLED element, etc., for example, a silicon substrate, etc. And a plastic substrate, and those obtained by attaching a transparent conductive film, a color filter film, an electrode, and a TFT to them. On these substrates, usually, a black matrix for isolating each pixel may be formed, or a transparent resin layer may be provided for promoting adhesion.
It is also preferable that the plastic substrate has a gas barrier layer and / or a solvent resistant layer on the surface thereof.
 本発明に使用する基板の光透過率は、80%以上であるのが好ましい。また、プラスチック基板は光学的等方性のポリマーフィルムを用いるのが好ましい。ポリマーの具体例及び好ましい態様は、特開2002-22942号公報の段落番号[0013]の記載を適用できる。また、従来知られているポリカーボネートやポリスルホンのような複屈折の発現しやすいポリマーであっても国際公開WO00/26705号公報に記載の分子を修飾することで該発現性を低下させたものを用いることもできる。 The light transmittance of the substrate used in the present invention is preferably 80% or more. The plastic substrate is preferably an optically isotropic polymer film. As specific examples and preferred embodiments of the polymer, the description in paragraph [0013] of JP-A-2002-22294 can be applied. Further, even a conventionally known polymer such as polycarbonate or polysulfone that easily develops birefringence is used by reducing the expression by modifying the molecule described in International Publication WO00 / 26705. You can also.
3.液晶セル
 本発明は、本発明の偏光膜を内部に有する液晶セルに関する。より具体的には、本発明は、一対の基板と、その間に配置された、液晶層、カラーフィルタ層、及び本発明の偏光膜を有する液晶セルに関する。本発明の偏光膜は、例えば、セル内に入射する直線偏光が偏光解消され散乱光が生じてしまうのを軽減するのに寄与する偏光層として利用されるであろう。この作用を十分に発揮するためには、本発明の偏光膜を、前記カラーフィルタ層と前記液晶層との間に配置するのが好ましい。
3. TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a liquid crystal cell having the polarizing film of the present invention inside. More specifically, the present invention relates to a liquid crystal cell having a pair of substrates and a liquid crystal layer, a color filter layer, and the polarizing film of the present invention disposed therebetween. The polarizing film of the present invention will be used, for example, as a polarizing layer that contributes to reducing the depolarization of linearly polarized light entering the cell and the generation of scattered light. In order to sufficiently exhibit this function, it is preferable to dispose the polarizing film of the present invention between the color filter layer and the liquid crystal layer.
 本発明の偏光膜は、前記方法によって、例えば、カラーフィルタ基板の表面に、直接形成することができる。また、以下に説明する転写材料を用い転写して形成してもよい。即ち、本発明の偏光膜を用いた液晶セルの製造方法の一例として、前記偏光膜を、転写材料から転写して形成することを含む方法が挙げられる。転写材料を用いて偏光膜を形成することにより、工程数を軽減して、簡易な方法で良好な表示特性のセル及び表示装置を作製することができる。 The polarizing film of the present invention can be directly formed on the surface of a color filter substrate, for example, by the above method. Alternatively, the transfer material described below may be used for transfer. That is, an example of a method for producing a liquid crystal cell using the polarizing film of the present invention includes a method including forming the polarizing film by transferring it from a transfer material. By forming a polarizing film using a transfer material, the number of steps can be reduced, and a cell and a display device with good display characteristics can be manufactured by a simple method.
 以下、前記偏光膜を、液晶表示装置内、特に液晶セル内に形成するのに有用な転写材料について説明する。
3.-1 転写材料
 本発明に使用可能な転写材料は、支持体と、偏光膜とを少なくとも有する。さらに、偏光膜上に、少なくとも一層の感光性樹脂層を有しているのが好ましい。感光性樹脂層は、パターニング等の工程を経ない場合であっても、偏光膜の転写を容易にし、有用である。また、例えば、支持体と偏光膜との間には、転写時に相手基板側の凹凸を吸収するためのクッション性等の力学特性コントロール、あるいは凹凸追従性付与のための層を有していてもよいし、また、偏光膜の色素の配向を制御するための配向層として機能する層が配置されてもよいし、双方の層を有していてもよい。また、感光性樹脂層の表面保護などの目的から、最表面に剥離可能な保護層を設けてもよい。
Hereinafter, a transfer material useful for forming the polarizing film in a liquid crystal display device, particularly in a liquid crystal cell, will be described.
3. -1 Transfer Material The transfer material that can be used in the present invention has at least a support and a polarizing film. Furthermore, it is preferable to have at least one photosensitive resin layer on the polarizing film. The photosensitive resin layer is useful because it facilitates the transfer of the polarizing film even when the process such as patterning is not performed. Further, for example, between the support and the polarizing film, there may be a layer for controlling mechanical properties such as cushioning for absorbing irregularities on the counterpart substrate side during transfer, or for imparting irregularity followability. Alternatively, a layer functioning as an alignment layer for controlling the alignment of the dye of the polarizing film may be disposed, or both layers may be provided. Moreover, you may provide the protective layer which can peel on the outermost surface for the objectives, such as surface protection of the photosensitive resin layer.
 上記の転写材料に用いられる支持体は、透明でも不透明でもよく特に限定はない。支持体を構成するポリマーの例には、セルロースエステル(例、セルロースアセテート、セルロースプロピオネート、セルロースブチレート、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート、セルロースアセテートブチレート)、ポリオレフィン(例、ノルボルネン系ポリマー)、ポリ(メタ)アクリル酸エステル(例、ポリメチルメタクリレート)、ポリカーボネート、ポリエステル及びポリスルホンが含まれる。製造工程において光学特性を検査する目的には、透明支持体は透明で低複屈折の材料が好ましく、低複屈折性の観点からはセルロースエステル及びノルボルネン系が好ましい。市販のノルボルネン系ポリマーとしては、アートン(JSR(株)製)、ゼオネックス、ゼオノア(以上、日本ゼオン(株)製)などを用いることができる。また安価なポリカーボネートやポリエチレンテレフタレート等も好ましく用いられる。 The support used for the above transfer material may be transparent or opaque and is not particularly limited. Examples of the polymer constituting the support include cellulose ester (eg, cellulose acetate, cellulose propionate, cellulose butyrate, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose acetate butyrate), polyolefin (eg, norbornene-based polymer), poly (Meth) acrylic acid esters (eg, polymethyl methacrylate), polycarbonate, polyester and polysulfone are included. For the purpose of inspecting optical properties in the production process, the transparent support is preferably a transparent and low birefringent material, and cellulose ester and norbornene are preferred from the viewpoint of low birefringence. As a commercially available norbornene-based polymer, Arton (manufactured by JSR Co., Ltd.), Zeonex, Zeonore (manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd.), or the like can be used. Inexpensive polycarbonate, polyethylene terephthalate, and the like are also preferably used.
 前記偏光膜は、上記塗布を利用した方法により、上記支持体上に形成される。また、支持体上に配向膜を形成し、その上に、塗布により偏光膜を形成してもよい。なお、転写材料が有する偏光膜は、偏光性能に充分な光学特性を満足している必要はなく、例えば、転写される過程において実施される露光工程を通じて、偏光性能が発現又は変化して、最終的に偏光フィルムに必要な偏光性能を示すものであってもよい。 The polarizing film is formed on the support by a method using the coating. Alternatively, an alignment film may be formed on the support, and a polarizing film may be formed thereon by coating. Note that the polarizing film included in the transfer material does not need to satisfy the optical characteristics sufficient for the polarization performance. For example, the polarization performance is expressed or changed through the exposure process performed in the transfer process, and the final film is obtained. In particular, the polarizing film may exhibit a polarizing performance necessary for the polarizing film.
感光性樹脂層:
 前記転写材料は、感光性樹脂層を有しているのが好ましい。前記感光性樹脂層は、感光性樹脂組成物よりなり、前記感光性樹脂層は、少なくとも、(1)アルカリ可溶性樹脂と、(2)モノマー又はオリゴマーと、(3)光重合開始剤又は光重合開始剤系と、を含む樹脂組成物から形成するのが好ましい。
Photosensitive resin layer:
The transfer material preferably has a photosensitive resin layer. The photosensitive resin layer is made of a photosensitive resin composition, and the photosensitive resin layer includes at least (1) an alkali-soluble resin, (2) a monomer or an oligomer, and (3) a photopolymerization initiator or photopolymerization. It is preferable to form from the resin composition containing an initiator system.
(1)アルカリ可溶性樹脂
 前記アルカリ可溶性樹脂(以下、単に「バインダ」ということがある。)としては、側鎖にカルボン酸基やカルボン酸塩基などの極性基を有するポリマーが好ましい。その例としては、特開昭59-44615号公報、特公昭54-34327号公報、特公昭58-12577号公報、特公昭54-25957号公報、特開昭59-53836号公報及び特開昭59-71048号公報に記載されているようなメタクリル酸共重合体、アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体等を挙げることができる。また側鎖にカルボン酸基を有するセルロース誘導体も挙げることができ、またこの他にも、水酸基を有するポリマーに環状酸無水物を付加したものも好ましく使用することができる。また、特に好ましい例として、米国特許第4139391号明細書に記載のベンジル(メタ)アクリレートと(メタ)アクリル酸との共重合体や、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートと(メタ)アクリル酸と他のモノマーとの多元共重合体を挙げることができる。これらの極性基を有するバインダポリマーは、単独で用いてもよく、或いは通常の膜形成性のポリマーと併用する組成物の状態で使用してもよく、感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対する含有量は20~50質量%が一般的であり、25~45質量%が好ましい。
(1) Alkali-soluble resin The alkali-soluble resin (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “binder”) is preferably a polymer having a polar group such as a carboxylic acid group or a carboxylic acid group in the side chain. Examples thereof include JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12577, JP-B-54-25957, JP-A-59-53836, and JP-A-57-36. Methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partially esterified maleic acid copolymer as described in JP-A-59-71048 Etc. Moreover, the cellulose derivative which has a carboxylic acid group in a side chain can also be mentioned, In addition to this, what added the cyclic acid anhydride to the polymer which has a hydroxyl group can also be used preferably. Further, as particularly preferred examples, copolymers of benzyl (meth) acrylate and (meth) acrylic acid described in US Pat. No. 4,139,391, benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid and other monomers And a multi-component copolymer. The binder polymer having these polar groups may be used alone or in the state of a composition used in combination with a normal film-forming polymer, and contained in the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. The amount is generally 20 to 50% by mass, preferably 25 to 45% by mass.
(2)モノマー又はオリゴマー
 前記感光性樹脂層に使用されるモノマー又はオリゴマーとしては、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を2個以上有し、光の照射によって付加重合するモノマー又はオリゴマーであることが好ましい。そのようなモノマー及びオリゴマーとしては、分子中に少なくとも1個の付加重合可能なエチレン性不飽和基を有し、沸点が常圧で100℃以上の化合物を挙げることができる。その例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート及びフェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートなどの単官能アクリレートや単官能メタクリレート;ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンジアクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(アクリロイルオキシプロピル)エーテル、トリ(アクリロイルオキシエチル)イソシアヌレート、トリ(アクリロイルオキシエチル)シアヌレート、グリセリントリ(メタ)アクリレート;トリメチロールプロパンやグリセリン等の多官能アルコールにエチレンオキシド又はプロピレンオキシドを付加した後(メタ)アクリレート化したもの等の多官能アクリレートや多官能メタクリレートを挙げることができる。
(2) Monomer or oligomer The monomer or oligomer used in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably a monomer or oligomer that has two or more ethylenically unsaturated double bonds and undergoes addition polymerization by light irradiation. . Examples of such monomers and oligomers include compounds having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group in the molecule and having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher at normal pressure. Examples include monofunctional acrylates and monofunctional methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) ) Acrylate, trimethylolethane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane diacrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, di Pentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, hexane All di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) cyanurate, glycerin tri (meth) acrylate; multifunctional such as trimethylolpropane and glycerin Polyfunctional acrylates and polyfunctional methacrylates such as those obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to alcohol and then (meth) acrylated can be mentioned.
 更に特公昭48-41708号公報、特公昭50-6034号公報及び特開昭51-37193号公報に記載されているウレタンアクリレート類;特開昭48-64183号公報、特公昭49-43191号公報及び特公昭52-30490号公報に記載されているポリエステルアクリレート類;エポキシ樹脂と(メタ)アクリル酸の反応生成物であるエポキシアクリレート類等の多官能アクリレー卜やメタクリレートを挙げることができる。
 これらの中で、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートが好ましい。
 また、この他、特開平11-133600号公報に記載の「重合性化合物B」も好適なものとして挙げることができる。
 これらのモノマー又はオリゴマーは、単独でも、2種類以上を混合して用いてもよく、感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対する含有量は5~50質量%が一般的であり、10~40質量%が好ましい。
Further, urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-B-50-6034 and JP-A-51-37193; JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49-43191 And polyester acrylates described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 52-30490; polyfunctional acrylates such as epoxy acrylates which are reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth) acrylic acid, and methacrylates.
Among these, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, and dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate are preferable.
In addition, “polymerizable compound B” described in JP-A-11-133600 can also be mentioned as a preferable example.
These monomers or oligomers may be used alone or in admixture of two or more. The content of the photosensitive resin composition with respect to the total solid content is generally 5 to 50% by mass, and 10 to 40% by mass. % Is preferred.
(3)光重合開始剤又は光重合開始剤系
 前記感光性樹脂層に使用される光重合開始剤又は光重合開始剤系としては、米国特許第2367660号明細書に開示されているビシナルポリケタルドニル化合物、米国特許第2448828号明細書に記載されているアシロインエーテル化合物、米国特許第2722512号明細書に記載のα-炭化水素で置換された芳香族アシロイン化合物、米国特許第3046127号明細書及び同第2951758号明細書に記載の多核キノン化合物、米国特許第3549367号明細書に記載のトリアリールイミダゾール2量体とp-アミノケトンの組み合わせ、特公昭51-48516号公報に記載のベンゾチアゾール化合物とトリハロメチル-s-トリアジン化合物、米国特許第4239850号明細書に記載されているトリハロメチル-トリアジン化合物、米国特許第4212976号明細書に記載されているトリハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物等を挙げることができる。特に、トリハロメチル-s-トリアジン、トリハロメチルオキサジアゾール及びトリアリールイミダゾール2量体が好ましい。
 また、この他、特開平11-133600号公報に記載の「重合開始剤C」も好適なものとしてあげることができる。
 これらの光重合開始剤又は光重合開始剤系は、単独でも、2種類以上を混合して用いてもよいが、特に2種類以上を用いることが好ましい。少なくとも2種の光重合開始剤を用いると、表示特性、特に表示のムラが少なくできる。
 感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対する光重合開始剤又は光重合開始剤系の含有量は、0.5~20質量%が一般的であり、1~15質量%が好ましい。
(3) Photopolymerization initiator or photopolymerization initiator system As the photopolymerization initiator or photopolymerization initiator system used in the photosensitive resin layer, a vicinal poly disclosed in US Pat. No. 2,367,660 is used. Ketaldonyl compounds, acyloin ether compounds described in US Pat. No. 2,448,828, aromatic acyloin compounds substituted with α-hydrocarbons described in US Pat. No. 2,722,512, US Pat. No. 3,046,127 And a polynuclear quinone compound described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,951,758, a combination of a triarylimidazole dimer described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,549,367 and a p-aminoketone, and a benzoin described in JP-B-51-48516. Thiazole compounds and trihalomethyl-s-triazine compounds, US Pat. No. 4,239,850 The listed trihalomethyl - triazine compound include a trihalomethyl oxadiazole compounds described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,212,976. In particular, trihalomethyl-s-triazine, trihalomethyloxadiazole, and triarylimidazole dimer are preferable.
In addition, “polymerization initiator C” described in JP-A-11-133600 can also be mentioned as a preferable example.
These photopolymerization initiators or photopolymerization initiator systems may be used singly or as a mixture of two or more, but it is particularly preferable to use two or more. When at least two kinds of photopolymerization initiators are used, display characteristics, particularly display unevenness, can be reduced.
The content of the photopolymerization initiator or photopolymerization initiator system with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is generally 0.5 to 20% by mass, and preferably 1 to 15% by mass.
その他の層:
 転写材料の、支持体と偏光膜との間には、力学特性や凹凸追従性をコントロールするために熱可塑性樹脂層を形成することが好ましい。熱可塑性樹脂層に用いる成分としては、特開平5-72724号公報に記載されている有機高分子物質が好ましく、ヴイカーVicat法(具体的にはアメリカ材料試験法エーエステーエムデーASTMD1235によるポリマー軟化点測定法)による軟化点が約80℃以下の有機高分子物質より選ばれることが特に好ましい。具体的には、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレンなどのポリオレフィン、エチレンと酢酸ビニル或いはそのケン化物の様なエチレン共重合体、エチレンとアクリル酸エステル或いはそのケン化物、ポリ塩化ビニル、塩化ビニルと酢酸ビニル及びそのケン化物の様な塩化ビニル共重合体、ポリ塩化ビニリデン、塩化ビニリデン共重合体、ポリスチレン、スチレンと(メタ)アクリル酸エステル或いはそのケン化物の様なスチレン共重合体、ポリビニルトルエン、ビニルトルエンと(メタ)アクリル酸エステル或いはそのケン化物の様なビニルトルエン共重合体、ポリ(メタ)アクリル酸エステル、(メタ)アクリル酸ブチルと酢酸ビニル等の(メタ)アクリル酸エステル共重合体、酢酸ビニル共重合体ナイロン、共重合ナイロン、N-アルコキシメチル化ナイロン、N-ジメチルアミノ化ナイロンの様なポリアミド樹脂等の有機高分子が挙げられる。
Other layers:
It is preferable to form a thermoplastic resin layer between the support and the polarizing film of the transfer material in order to control the mechanical properties and the unevenness followability. The component used in the thermoplastic resin layer is preferably an organic polymer substance described in JP-A-5-72724, and is a polymer softening point according to the Viker Vicat method (specifically, American Material Testing Method ASTM D1 ASTM D1235). It is particularly preferable that the softening point by the measurement method is selected from organic polymer substances having a temperature of about 80 ° C. or less. Specifically, polyolefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, ethylene copolymers such as ethylene and vinyl acetate or saponified products thereof, ethylene and acrylic acid esters or saponified products thereof, polyvinyl chloride, vinyl chloride and vinyl acetate and saponified products thereof. Vinyl chloride copolymer such as fluoride, polyvinylidene chloride, vinylidene chloride copolymer, polystyrene, styrene copolymer such as styrene and (meth) acrylic acid ester or saponified product thereof, polyvinyl toluene, vinyl toluene and (meta ) Vinyl toluene copolymer such as acrylic ester or saponified product thereof, poly (meth) acrylic ester, (meth) acrylic ester copolymer such as butyl (meth) acrylate and vinyl acetate, vinyl acetate copolymer Combined nylon, copolymer nylon, N-alkoxyme Le nylon, and organic polymeric polyamide resins such as N- dimethylamino nylon.
 転写材料においては、複数の塗布層の塗布時、及び塗布後の保存時における成分の混合を防止する目的から、中間層を設けることが好ましい。該中間層としては、特開平5-72724号公報に「分離層」として記載されている、酸素遮断機能のある酸素遮断膜を用いることが好ましく、この場合、露光時感度がアップし、露光機の時間負荷が減り、生産性が向上する。該酸素遮断膜としては、低い酸素透過性を示し、水又はアルカリ水溶液に分散又は溶解するものが好ましく、公知のものの中から適宜選択することができる。これらの内、特に好ましいのは、ポリビニルアルコールとポリビニルピロリドンとの組み合わせである。 In the transfer material, it is preferable to provide an intermediate layer for the purpose of preventing mixing of components during application of a plurality of application layers and during storage after application. As the intermediate layer, it is preferable to use an oxygen-blocking film having an oxygen-blocking function described as “separation layer” in JP-A-5-72724. This reduces the time load and improves productivity. The oxygen barrier film is preferably one that exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an aqueous alkali solution, and can be appropriately selected from known ones. Among these, a combination of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl pyrrolidone is particularly preferable.
 前記熱可塑性樹脂層や前記中間層を、前記配向層と兼用することもできる。特に前記中間層に好ましく用いられるポリビニルアルコール及びポリビニルピロリドンは配向層としても有効であり、中間層と配向層を1層にすることが好ましい。 The thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer can also be used as the alignment layer. In particular, polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl pyrrolidone preferably used for the intermediate layer are also effective as an alignment layer, and it is preferable that the intermediate layer and the alignment layer are made into one layer.
 樹脂層の上には、貯蔵の際の汚染や損傷から保護する為に薄い保護フィルムを設けることが好ましい。保護フィルムは仮支持体と同じか又は類似の材料からなってもよいが、樹脂層から容易に分離されねばならない。保護フィルム材料としては例えばシリコン紙、ポリオレフィンもしくはポリテトラフルオロエチレンシートが適当である。 It is preferable to provide a thin protective film on the resin layer in order to protect it from contamination and damage during storage. The protective film may be made of the same or similar material as the temporary support, but must be easily separated from the resin layer. As the protective film material, for example, silicon paper, polyolefin or polytetrafluoroethylene sheet is suitable.
 偏光膜及び感光性樹脂層、及び所望により形成される配向層、熱可塑性樹脂層及び中間層の各層は、前記偏光膜の形成方法と同様の方法で形成することができる。2以上の層を同時に塗布してもよい。同時塗布の方法については、米国特許第2761791号、同2941898号、同3508947号、同3526528号の各明細書及び原崎勇次著、コーティング工学、253頁、朝倉書店(1973)に記載がある。 The polarizing film and the photosensitive resin layer, and the alignment layer, the thermoplastic resin layer, and the intermediate layer formed as desired can be formed by the same method as the polarizing film forming method. Two or more layers may be applied simultaneously. The methods of simultaneous application are described in US Pat. Nos. 2,761,791, 2,941,898, 3,508,947, and 3,526,528 and Yuji Harasaki, Coating Engineering, page 253, Asakura Shoten (1973).
3.-2 転写材料を用いた偏光膜の形成方法:
 本発明でいう転写材料を基板上に転写する方法については特に制限されず、基板上に上記偏光膜及び感光性樹脂層を同時に転写できれば特に方法は限定されない。例えば、フィルム状に形成した本発明でいう転写材料を、感光性樹脂層面を基板表面側にして、ラミネータを用いて加熱及び/又は加圧したローラー又は平板で圧着又は加熱圧着して、貼り付けることができる。具体的には、特開平7-110575号公報、特開平11-77942号公報、特開2000-334836号公報、特開2002-148794号公報に記載のラミネータ及びラミネート方法が挙げられるが、低異物の観点で、特開平7-110575号公報に記載の方法を用いるのが好ましい。その後、支持体は剥離してもよく、剥離によって露出した偏光膜表面に、他の層、例えば電極層等を形成してもよい。
3. -2 Forming method of polarizing film using transfer material:
The method for transferring the transfer material on the substrate in the present invention is not particularly limited, and the method is not particularly limited as long as the polarizing film and the photosensitive resin layer can be simultaneously transferred onto the substrate. For example, the transfer material referred to in the present invention formed in a film shape is attached by pressing or thermocompression bonding with a roller or flat plate heated and / or pressurized using a laminator with the photosensitive resin layer side facing the substrate surface side. be able to. Specific examples include laminators and laminating methods described in JP-A-7-110575, JP-A-11-77942, JP-A-2000-334836, and JP-A-2002-148794. From this point of view, it is preferable to use the method described in JP-A-7-110575. Thereafter, the support may be peeled off, and another layer such as an electrode layer may be formed on the surface of the polarizing film exposed by peeling.
 転写材料を転写する被転写材料である基板については、特に制限されない。例えば、透明基板が用いられ、表面に酸化ケイ素皮膜を有するソーダガラス板、低膨張ガラス、ノンアルカリガラス、石英ガラス板等の公知のガラス板、或いは、プラスチックフィルム等を挙げることができる。被転写材料はまた透明基板上にカラーフィルタ等の層が設けられたものであってもよい。また、被転写材料は、予めカップリング処理を施しておくことにより、感光性樹脂層との密着を良好にすることができる。該カップリング処理としては、特開2000-39033号公報記載の方法が好適に用いられる。尚、特に限定されるわけではないが、基板の膜厚としては、700~1200μmが一般的に好ましい。
 偏光膜の上に粘着層を設けるのではなく、被転写材料の上に粘着層を設けておいてもよい。
There is no particular limitation on the substrate that is a transfer material to which the transfer material is transferred. For example, a soda glass plate having a silicon oxide film on the surface, a known glass plate such as a low expansion glass, a non-alkali glass, a quartz glass plate, or a plastic film can be used. The material to be transferred may be one in which a layer such as a color filter is provided on a transparent substrate. Moreover, the material to be transferred can be well adhered to the photosensitive resin layer by performing a coupling treatment in advance. As the coupling treatment, a method described in JP 2000-39033 A is preferably used. Although not particularly limited, the thickness of the substrate is generally preferably 700 to 1200 μm.
Instead of providing an adhesive layer on the polarizing film, an adhesive layer may be provided on the transfer material.
4.表示装置
 本発明は、本発明の偏光膜を少なくとも有する表示装置に関する。本発明の表示装置は、例えば、TN、STN、VA、ECB、IPS、又はOCBモードの、透過型、反射型、又は半透過型の液晶表示装置;及びOLEDなどのいずれであってもよい。
 特に好ましくは、本発明の偏光膜を、基板の内面側に設置してなる(いわゆる、インセル偏光膜)表示装置であり、特に好ましくは、本発明の偏光膜をカラーフィルター基板に積層してなる表示装置である。
4). TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a display device having at least the polarizing film of the present invention. The display device of the present invention may be, for example, a TN, STN, VA, ECB, IPS, or OCB mode transmissive, reflective, or transflective liquid crystal display device; and an OLED.
Particularly preferred is a display device in which the polarizing film of the present invention is disposed on the inner surface side of the substrate (so-called in-cell polarizing film), and particularly preferred is a laminate of the polarizing film of the present invention on a color filter substrate. It is a display device.
 以下、本発明を実施例に基づき更に詳細に説明するが、本発明はこれらに限定されない。以下、「部」は、「質量部」を、「%」は「質量%」を意味する。
 なお、以下の実施例中、光吸収異方性膜の光学特性に関する測定は下記の通り実施した。
<二色比>
 二色比は、ヨウ素系偏光素子を入射光学系に配した分光光度計で光吸収異方性膜の吸光度を測定した後、次式により計算した。
二色比(D)=Az/Ay
Az:光吸収異方性膜の吸収軸方向の偏光に対する吸光度
Ay:光吸収異方性膜の偏光軸方向の偏光に対する吸光度
EXAMPLES Hereinafter, although this invention is demonstrated in detail based on an Example, this invention is not limited to these. Hereinafter, “part” means “part by mass”, and “%” means “% by mass”.
In the following examples, the measurement of optical characteristics of the light absorption anisotropic film was performed as follows.
<Dichroic ratio>
The dichroic ratio was calculated by the following equation after measuring the absorbance of the light-absorbing anisotropic film with a spectrophotometer in which an iodine-type polarizing element was arranged in the incident optical system.
Dichroic ratio (D) = Az / Ay
Az: Absorbance with respect to polarized light in the absorption axis direction of the light absorption anisotropic film Ay: Absorbance with respect to polarization in the polarization axis direction of the light absorption anisotropic film
[実施例1:二色性色素A-2の合成例]
 下記のスキームにより、下記構造の二色性色素A-2を合成した。
[Example 1: Synthesis example of dichroic dye A-2]
A dichroic dye A-2 having the following structure was synthesized according to the following scheme.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
化合物1の合成:
 4-アミノ安息香酸10.0部を2.8N塩酸水130mlに溶解し、これを0℃に氷冷したものに対し、亜硝酸ナトリウム5.53部を水20mlに溶解させたものを5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ添加した。温度を保った状態で1時間程度攪拌し、ジアゾニウム塩の生成を確認した後に、m-トルイジン16.3部をメタノール150mlに溶解させ、0℃に氷冷したものの中に5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。滴下終了後、反応液を室温まで昇温し、水酸化ナトリウムで中和した。析出した生成物をろ過した後、アセトニトリルで懸濁洗浄を行い、乾燥した。乾燥後、13.2部の化合物1が得られた。
Synthesis of Compound 1:
A solution of 10.0 parts of 4-aminobenzoic acid in 130 ml of 2.8N aqueous hydrochloric acid and ice-cooled to 0 ° C. was obtained by dissolving 5.53 parts of sodium nitrite in 20 ml of water at 5 ° C. While maintaining the following temperature, it was added little by little. After stirring for about 1 hour while maintaining the temperature and confirming the formation of the diazonium salt, 16.3 parts of m-toluidine was dissolved in 150 ml of methanol, and the temperature of 5 ° C. or lower was added to the solution cooled to 0 ° C. with ice. It was dripped little by little while keeping. After completion of dropping, the reaction solution was warmed to room temperature and neutralized with sodium hydroxide. The precipitated product was filtered, suspended and washed with acetonitrile, and dried. After drying, 13.2 parts of compound 1 were obtained.
化合物2の合成:
 化合物1の10.0部を塩酸16.3ml、酢酸40ml、プロピオン酸60mlの混合酸溶媒に溶解し、これを0℃に氷冷したものに対し、亜硝酸ナトリウム2.97部を水10mlに溶解させたものを5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ添加した。温度を保った状態で1時間程度攪拌し、ジアゾニウム塩の生成を確認した後に、N、N-ジエチルアニリン5.84部をメタノール150mlに溶解し、0℃に氷冷したものの中に5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。滴下終了後、反応液を室温まで昇温し、そこに水116mlを滴下した。炭酸水素ナトリウムで反応液を中和したのち、析出した生成物をろ過し、水及びメタノールで洗浄を行い、乾燥した。乾燥後、11.0部の化合物2を得た。
Synthesis of compound 2:
10.0 parts of Compound 1 was dissolved in a mixed acid solvent of 16.3 ml of hydrochloric acid, 40 ml of acetic acid and 60 ml of propionic acid, and this was ice-cooled to 0 ° C., while 2.97 parts of sodium nitrite was dissolved in 10 ml of water. What was dissolved was added little by little while keeping the temperature of 5 ° C. or less. After stirring for about 1 hour while maintaining the temperature and confirming the formation of the diazonium salt, 5.84 parts of N, N-diethylaniline was dissolved in 150 ml of methanol and cooled to 0 ° C with ice at 5 ° C or less. The solution was added dropwise little by little while maintaining the temperature. After completion of the dropping, the reaction solution was warmed to room temperature, and 116 ml of water was added dropwise thereto. After neutralizing the reaction solution with sodium hydrogen carbonate, the precipitated product was filtered, washed with water and methanol, and dried. After drying, 11.0 parts of compound 2 were obtained.
二色性色素A-2の合成:
 化合物2の1.00部を10mlのTHFに溶解し、メタンスルホニルクロライド0.28部を加え、これを-5℃まで冷却した。ここに0.32部のDIPEA(ジイソプロピルエチルアミン)を2mlのTHFに溶解したものを0℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。この反応液を、0.36部の4-ブチルフェノール及び0.32部のDIPEAを5mlのTHFに溶解したものの中に0℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。反応液を室温まで昇温し、水20ml及びメタノール20mlを加えた。析出した結晶をろ過し、メタノールで洗浄を行い、乾燥後、0.80部のA-2を得た。A-2のN-メチルピロリドン溶媒中でのλmaxは522.9nmであった。即ちマゼンタ色素であった。
 なお、1H‐NMR(CDCl3)の詳細は、8.35(d,2H)、8.03(d,2H)、7.89(d,2H)、7.80(m,2H)、7.75(d,1H)、7.25(d,2H)、7.12(d,2H)、6.73(d,2H)、3.47(q,4H)、2.82(s,3H)、2.64(t,2H)、1.60(m,2H)、1.38(m,2H)、1.25(t,6H)、0.92(t,3H)であった。
 A-2は液晶性を有しており、178℃~244℃の範囲でネマチック相が確認された。また、偏光顕微鏡での観察により二色性色素であることが確認された。
Synthesis of dichroic dye A-2:
1.00 part of Compound 2 was dissolved in 10 ml of THF, 0.28 part of methanesulfonyl chloride was added, and this was cooled to -5 ° C. A solution prepared by dissolving 0.32 parts of DIPEA (diisopropylethylamine) in 2 ml of THF was added dropwise little by little while maintaining a temperature of 0 ° C. or lower. This reaction solution was added dropwise little by little while maintaining a temperature of 0 ° C. or less in a solution of 0.36 parts of 4-butylphenol and 0.32 parts of DIPEA in 5 ml of THF. The reaction solution was warmed to room temperature, and 20 ml of water and 20 ml of methanol were added. The precipitated crystals were filtered, washed with methanol, and dried to obtain 0.80 part of A-2. Λmax of A-2 in the N-methylpyrrolidone solvent was 522.9 nm. That is, it was a magenta dye.
The details of 1 H-NMR (CDCl 3 ) are as follows: 8.35 (d, 2H), 8.03 (d, 2H), 7.89 (d, 2H), 7.80 (m, 2H), 7.75 (d, 1H), 7.25 (d, 2H), 7.12 (d, 2H), 6.73 (d, 2H), 3.47 (q, 4H), 2.82 (s , 3H), 2.64 (t, 2H), 1.60 (m, 2H), 1.38 (m, 2H), 1.25 (t, 6H), 0.92 (t, 3H). It was.
A-2 has liquid crystallinity, and a nematic phase was confirmed in the range of 178 ° C. to 244 ° C. Moreover, it was confirmed that it was a dichroic dye by observation with a polarizing microscope.
[実施例2:二色性色素A-9の合成例]
 以下の合成スキームにより、下記構造の二色性色素A-9を合成した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
[Example 2: Synthesis example of dichroic dye A-9]
A dichroic dye A-9 having the following structure was synthesized according to the following synthesis scheme.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
化合物3の合成:
 4-アミノベンズアルデヒド12.1部を3.5N塩酸水85mlに溶解し、これを0℃に氷冷したものに対し、亜硝酸ナトリウム7.58部を水20mlに溶解させたものを5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ添加した。温度を保った状態で1時間程度攪拌し、ジアゾニウム塩の生成を確認した後に、不溶物をろ別し、m-トルイジン11.8部をメタノール80mlに溶解させ、0℃に氷冷したものの中に5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。滴下終了後、反応液を室温まで昇温し、析出した生成物をろ過した後、メタノールで懸濁洗浄を行い、乾燥した。乾燥後、15.0部の化合物3が得られた。
Synthesis of compound 3:
Dissolve 12.1 parts of 4-aminobenzaldehyde in 85 ml of 3.5N aqueous hydrochloric acid and cool it to 0 ° C with ice, and dissolve 5 parts of sodium nitrite in 20 ml of water at 5 ° C or less. Was added little by little while maintaining the temperature. After stirring for about 1 hour while maintaining the temperature and confirming the formation of the diazonium salt, the insoluble material was filtered off, and 11.8 parts of m-toluidine was dissolved in 80 ml of methanol and cooled to 0 ° C with ice. The solution was added dropwise little by little while maintaining a temperature of 5 ° C. or lower. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction solution was warmed to room temperature, the precipitated product was filtered, suspended and washed with methanol, and dried. After drying, 15.0 parts of compound 3 were obtained.
化合物4の合成:
 化合物3の5.51部を塩酸5.0ml、酢酸28ml、水14mlの混合酸溶媒に溶解し、これを0℃に氷冷したものに対し、亜硝酸ナトリウム1.52部を水5mlに溶解させたものを5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ添加した。温度を保った状態で1時間程度攪拌し、ジアゾニウム塩の生成を確認した後に、不溶物をろ別し、N、N-ジエチルアニリン2.98部をメタノール100mlに溶解し、0℃に氷冷したものの中に5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。滴下終了後、反応液を室温まで昇温し、そこに水100mlを滴下する。炭酸水素ナトリウムで反応液を中和したのち、析出した生成物をろ過し、水及びメタノールで洗浄を行い、乾燥した。乾燥後、6.30部の化合物4を得た。
二色性色素A-9の合成:
 化合物4の1.00部を10mlのトルエンに溶解し、4-プロピルアニリン0.34部及びパラトルエンスルホン酸触媒量を加え、還流下3時間攪拌した。反応液を室温に戻し、メタノール30mlを加え、析出した結晶をろ過し、メタノールで洗浄を行い、乾燥後、0.92部のA-9を得た。
 A-9のN-メチルピロリドン溶媒中でのλmaxは521.0nmであった。即ちマゼンタ色素であった。
 なお、1H‐NMR(CDCl3)の詳細は、8.53(s,1H)、8.03(t,4H)、7.85(d,2H)、7.80(m,2H)、7.71(d,1H)、7.22(d,2H)、6.72(d,2H)、3.47(q,4H)、2.82(s,3H)、2.61(t,2H)、1.65(m,2H)、1.23(t,6H)、0.96(t,3H)であった。
 A-9は液晶性を有しており、168℃~288℃の範囲でネマチック相が確認された。また、偏光顕微鏡での観察により二色性色素であることが確認された。
Synthesis of compound 4:
5.51 parts of Compound 3 was dissolved in a mixed acid solvent of 5.0 ml of hydrochloric acid, 28 ml of acetic acid, and 14 ml of water, and 1.52 parts of sodium nitrite was dissolved in 5 ml of water against this which was ice-cooled to 0 ° C. The resulting mixture was added little by little while maintaining the temperature of 5 ° C. or lower. The mixture was stirred for about 1 hour while maintaining the temperature. After confirming the formation of the diazonium salt, the insoluble matter was filtered off, 2.98 parts of N, N-diethylaniline was dissolved in 100 ml of methanol, and cooled to 0 ° C. with ice. The solution was added dropwise little by little while maintaining a temperature of 5 ° C. or lower. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction solution is warmed to room temperature, and 100 ml of water is added dropwise thereto. After neutralizing the reaction solution with sodium hydrogen carbonate, the precipitated product was filtered, washed with water and methanol, and dried. After drying, 6.30 parts of compound 4 were obtained.
Synthesis of dichroic dye A-9:
1.00 part of Compound 4 was dissolved in 10 ml of toluene, 0.34 part of 4-propylaniline and a catalytic amount of paratoluenesulfonic acid were added, and the mixture was stirred under reflux for 3 hours. The reaction solution was returned to room temperature, 30 ml of methanol was added, the precipitated crystals were filtered, washed with methanol, and dried to obtain 0.92 parts of A-9.
Λmax of A-9 in N-methylpyrrolidone solvent was 521.0 nm. That is, it was a magenta dye.
The details of 1 H-NMR (CDCl 3 ) are 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.03 (t, 4H), 7.85 (d, 2H), 7.80 (m, 2H), 7.71 (d, 1H), 7.22 (d, 2H), 6.72 (d, 2H), 3.47 (q, 4H), 2.82 (s, 3H), 2.61 (t , 2H), 1.65 (m, 2H), 1.23 (t, 6H), and 0.96 (t, 3H).
A-9 has liquid crystallinity, and a nematic phase was confirmed in the range of 168 ° C. to 288 ° C. Moreover, it was confirmed that it was a dichroic dye by observation with a polarizing microscope.
[実施例3:二色性色素A-26の合成例] [Example 3: Synthesis example of dichroic dye A-26]
 以下の合成スキームにより、下記構造の二色性色素A-26を合成した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
A dichroic dye A-26 having the following structure was synthesized according to the following synthesis scheme.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
化合物5の合成:
 4-アミノ安息香酸10.0部を2.8N塩酸水130mlに溶解し、これを0℃に氷冷したものに対し、亜硝酸ナトリウム5.53部を水20mlに溶解させたものを5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ添加した。温度を保った状態で1時間程度攪拌し、ジアゾニウム塩の生成を確認した後に、N、N-ジエチルアニリン1.09部をメタノール150mlに溶解し、0℃に氷冷したものの中に5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。滴下終了後、反応液を室温まで昇温し、そこに水116mlを滴下した。炭酸水素ナトリウムで反応液を中和したのち、析出した生成物をろ過し、水及びメタノールで洗浄を行い、乾燥した。乾燥後、21.0部の化合物5を得た。
Synthesis of compound 5:
A solution of 10.0 parts of 4-aminobenzoic acid in 130 ml of 2.8N aqueous hydrochloric acid and ice-cooled to 0 ° C. was obtained by dissolving 5.53 parts of sodium nitrite in 20 ml of water at 5 ° C. While maintaining the following temperature, it was added little by little. After stirring for about 1 hour while maintaining the temperature and confirming the formation of the diazonium salt, 1.09 parts of N, N-diethylaniline was dissolved in 150 ml of methanol and cooled to 0 ° C with ice at 5 ° C or less. The solution was added dropwise little by little while maintaining the temperature. After completion of the dropping, the reaction solution was warmed to room temperature, and 116 ml of water was added dropwise thereto. After neutralizing the reaction solution with sodium hydrogen carbonate, the precipitated product was filtered, washed with water and methanol, and dried. After drying, 21.0 parts of compound 5 were obtained.
化合物6の合成:
 4-アミノピリジン5.00部を85%リン酸水溶液25mlに溶解し、これを0℃に氷冷したものに対し、亜硝酸ナトリウム4.03部を5℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ添加した。温度を保った状態で1時間程度攪拌し、ジアゾニウム塩の生成を確認した後に、オルトクレゾール5.74部を5.0N水酸化ナトリウム水溶液に溶解し、5℃に氷冷したものの中に30℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。反応液に水220mlを加え、塩酸で中和し、酢酸エチルで抽出した。抽出液を硫酸ナトリウムで乾燥し、濃縮後アセトニトリルで懸濁洗浄及び乾燥後に、化合物6を3.80部得た。
Synthesis of compound 6:
Dissolve 5.00 parts of 4-aminopyridine in 25 ml of 85% aqueous phosphoric acid solution, and add 4.03 parts of sodium nitrite little by little while maintaining the temperature at 5 ° C or lower with respect to what was ice-cooled to 0 ° C. did. After stirring for about 1 hour while maintaining the temperature and confirming the formation of the diazonium salt, 5.74 parts of orthocresol was dissolved in 5.0N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution and cooled to 5 ° C with ice at 30 ° C. The solution was dropped little by little while maintaining the following temperature. 220 ml of water was added to the reaction solution, neutralized with hydrochloric acid, and extracted with ethyl acetate. The extract was dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, suspended and washed with acetonitrile, and 3.80 parts of compound 6 was obtained.
二色性色素A-26の合成:
 化合物5の1.00部を10mlのTHFに溶解し、メタンスルホニルクロライド0.38部を加え、これを-5℃まで冷却した。ここに0.43部のDIPEAを2mlのTHFに溶解したものを0℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。この反応液を、0.72部の化合物6及び0.43部のDIPEAを5mlのTHFに溶解したものの中に0℃以下の温度を保ちながら少しずつ滴下した。反応液を室温まで昇温し、水20ml及びメタノール20mlを加えた。析出した結晶をろ過し、メタノールで洗浄を行い、乾燥後、0.75部のA-26を得た。
 A-26のN-メチルピロリドン溶媒中でのλmaxは478.0nmであった。即ちイエロー色素であった。
 なお、1H‐NMR(CDCl3)の詳細は、8.80(d,2H)、8.32(d,2H)、7.91(t,6H)、7.70(d,2H)、7.37(d,1H)、6.74(d,2H)、3.47(q,4H)、2.37(s,3H)、1.25(t,6H)であった。
 A-26は液晶性を有しており、降温時に170℃~200℃の範囲でネマチック相が確認された。また、偏光顕微鏡での観察により二色性色素であることが確認された。
Synthesis of dichroic dye A-26:
1.00 part of Compound 5 was dissolved in 10 ml of THF, 0.38 part of methanesulfonyl chloride was added, and this was cooled to -5 ° C. What melt | dissolved 0.43 part DIPEA in 2 ml THF here was dripped little by little, keeping the temperature of 0 degrees C or less. This reaction solution was added dropwise little by little while maintaining a temperature of 0 ° C. or lower in a solution obtained by dissolving 0.72 parts of Compound 6 and 0.43 parts of DIPEA in 5 ml of THF. The reaction solution was warmed to room temperature, and 20 ml of water and 20 ml of methanol were added. The precipitated crystals were filtered, washed with methanol, and dried to obtain 0.75 part of A-26.
Λmax of A-26 in N-methylpyrrolidone solvent was 478.0 nm. That is, it was a yellow dye.
The details of 1 H-NMR (CDCl 3 ) are 8.80 (d, 2H), 8.32 (d, 2H), 7.91 (t, 6H), 7.70 (d, 2H), 7.37 (d, 1H), 6.74 (d, 2H), 3.47 (q, 4H), 2.37 (s, 3H), 1.25 (t, 6H).
A-26 has liquid crystallinity, and a nematic phase was confirmed in the range of 170 ° C. to 200 ° C. when the temperature was lowered. Moreover, it was confirmed that it was a dichroic dye by observation with a polarizing microscope.
 その他の化合物例についても上記と同様の方法で合成できる。
 下記に化合物例のN-メチルピロリドン溶媒中でのλmaxと偏光顕微鏡観察による液晶層変化の挙動を示す。
Other compound examples can be synthesized by the same method as described above.
The following shows the behavior of λmax in the N-methylpyrrolidone solvent of the compound example and the change in the liquid crystal layer by observation with a polarizing microscope.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
  
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
  
[実施例4]
 クロロホルム99質量部に、二色性色素A-2を1質量部加え、撹拌溶解後濾過して二色性色素組成物塗布液を得た。次に、ガラス基板上に形成しラビングした配向膜上に、前記塗布液を塗布し、この後、室温でクロロホルム自然乾燥して、膜を形成した。配向膜としては、下記ポリビニルアルコールを使用した。
[Example 4]
1 part by mass of dichroic dye A-2 was added to 99 parts by mass of chloroform, dissolved by stirring and filtered to obtain a dichroic dye composition coating solution. Next, the coating solution was applied onto an alignment film formed on a glass substrate and rubbed, and then the film was naturally dried at room temperature to form a film. The following polyvinyl alcohol was used as the alignment film.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 得られた膜の面内の吸収軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Az)、及び膜面内の偏光軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Ay)とから求めた二色比(D)は18であった。即ち、得られた膜は、光吸収異方性があり、偏光膜として機能し得ることがわかった。 The dichroic ratio obtained from the absorbance (Az) for polarized light having a vibration plane in the absorption axis direction in the plane of the film and the absorbance (Ay) for polarized light having a vibration plane in the direction of the polarization axis in the film plane ( D) was 18. That is, it was found that the obtained film had light absorption anisotropy and could function as a polarizing film.
[実施例5]
 クロロホルム99質量部に、二色性色素A-9を1質量部加え、撹拌溶解後濾過して二色性色素組成物塗布液を得た。この塗布液を用い、実施例4と同様に膜を作製した。
 得られた膜における面内の吸収軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Az)、及び膜面内の偏光軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Ay)とから求めた二色比(D)は58であった。即ち、得られた膜は、光吸収異方性があり、偏光膜として機能し得ることがわかった。
[Example 5]
1 part by mass of dichroic dye A-9 was added to 99 parts by mass of chloroform, dissolved by stirring and filtered to obtain a dichroic dye composition coating solution. Using this coating solution, a film was prepared in the same manner as in Example 4.
The dichroic ratio obtained from the absorbance (Az) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the in-plane absorption axis direction and the absorbance (Ay) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the direction of the polarization axis in the film ( D) was 58. That is, it was found that the obtained film had light absorption anisotropy and could function as a polarizing film.
[実施例6]
 クロロホルム99質量部に、二色性色素A-9を0.5質量部及び二色性色素A-26を0.5質量部加え、撹拌溶解後濾過して二色性色素組成物塗布液を得た。この塗布液を用い、実施例4と同様に厚み0.05~0.2μmの膜を作製した。
 得られた膜における面内の吸収軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Az)、及び膜面内の偏光軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Ay)とから求めた二色比(D)は37であった。即ち、得られた膜は、光吸収異方性があり、偏光膜として機能し得ることがわかった。
[Example 6]
Add 0.5 parts by weight of dichroic dye A-9 and 0.5 parts by weight of dichroic dye A-26 to 99 parts by weight of chloroform, stir and dissolve, and filter to obtain a dichroic dye composition coating solution. Obtained. Using this coating solution, a film having a thickness of 0.05 to 0.2 μm was produced in the same manner as in Example 4.
The dichroic ratio obtained from the absorbance (Az) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the in-plane absorption axis direction and the absorbance (Ay) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the direction of the polarization axis in the film ( D) was 37. That is, it was found that the obtained film had light absorption anisotropy and could function as a polarizing film.
[実施例7]
 クロロホルム99質量部に二色性色素A-9を0.3質量部、二色性色素A-26を0.3質量部、及び下記二色性色素Bを0.4質量部加え、撹拌溶解後濾過して二色性色素組成物塗布液を得た。なお、二色性色素BはNMP中での吸収極大波長が615.0nmであり、即ち、シアン色素であり、209℃~227℃の範囲にネマチック相を有し、また、偏光顕微鏡での観察により二色性色素であることが確認された。
 この塗布液を用い、実施例4と同様に膜を作製した。得られた膜における膜面内の吸収軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Az)、及び素膜面内の偏光軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Ay)とから求めた二色比(D)は28であった。即ち、得られた膜は、光吸収異方性があり、偏光膜として機能し得ることがわかった。
 また、得られた光吸収異方性膜は黒色の色相を有しており、C光源を光源として用いた透過光スペクトルは、xy色度図上で、x=0.29、y=0.32の値を示した。
[Example 7]
Add 0.3 parts by weight of dichroic dye A-9, 0.3 parts by weight of dichroic dye A-26, and 0.4 parts by weight of dichroic dye B below to 99 parts by weight of chloroform, and dissolve with stirring. After filtration, a dichroic dye composition coating solution was obtained. The dichroic dye B has an absorption maximum wavelength in NMP of 615.0 nm, that is, a cyan dye, has a nematic phase in the range of 209 ° C. to 227 ° C., and is observed with a polarizing microscope. Was confirmed to be a dichroic dye.
Using this coating solution, a film was prepared in the same manner as in Example 4. Two colors obtained from the absorbance (Az) with respect to the polarized light having the vibration plane in the absorption axis direction within the film surface and the absorbance (Ay) with respect to the polarized light having the vibration plane in the polarization axis direction within the surface of the obtained film. The ratio (D) was 28. That is, it was found that the obtained film had light absorption anisotropy and could function as a polarizing film.
Further, the obtained light absorption anisotropic film has a black hue, and the transmitted light spectrum using the C light source as the light source has x = 0.29, y = 0. A value of 32 was indicated.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
[実施例8]
 クロロホルム99質量部に、二色性色素A-26を0.4質量部及び二色性色素Bを0.6質量部加え、撹拌溶解後濾過して二色性色素組成物塗布液を得た。この塗布液を用い、実施例4と同様に厚み0.05~0.2μmの膜を作製した。
 得られた膜における面内の吸収軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Az)、及び膜面内の偏光軸方向に振動面を有する偏光に対する吸光度(Ay)とから求めた二色比(D)は28であった。即ち、得られた膜は、光吸収異方性があり、偏光膜として機能し得ることがわかった。
 また、得られた光吸収異方性膜は黒色の色相を有しており、C光源を光源として用いた透過光スペクトルは、xy色度図上で、x=0.32、y=0.34の値を示した。
[Example 8]
To 99 parts by mass of chloroform, 0.4 part by mass of dichroic dye A-26 and 0.6 part by mass of dichroic dye B were added, dissolved by stirring, and filtered to obtain a dichroic dye composition coating solution. . Using this coating solution, a film having a thickness of 0.05 to 0.2 μm was produced in the same manner as in Example 4.
The dichroic ratio obtained from the absorbance (Az) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the in-plane absorption axis direction and the absorbance (Ay) with respect to polarized light having a vibration plane in the direction of the polarization axis in the film ( D) was 28. That is, it was found that the obtained film had light absorption anisotropy and could function as a polarizing film.
Further, the obtained light absorption anisotropic film has a black hue, and the transmitted light spectrum using the C light source as the light source is x = 0.32, y = 0. A value of 34 was shown.
[比較例1]
 特表2007-536415号公報に記載の液晶材料と二色性色素とを含む組成物から形成した膜についても同様に二色比を測定した。膜厚は2~8μmであった。その結果、この比較例用の膜では、二色比は13であり、本発明の実施例よりも格段に低いことがわかった。
[Comparative Example 1]
The dichroic ratio was similarly measured for a film formed from a composition containing a liquid crystal material and a dichroic dye described in JP-T-2007-536415. The film thickness was 2-8 μm. As a result, it was found that the dichroic ratio of this comparative example film was 13, which was much lower than that of the example of the present invention.
[比較例2]
 クロロホルム99質量部に、特開平11-305036号公報記載のアゾ色素No.(6)を1質量部加え、撹拌溶解後濾過して二色性色素組成物塗布液を得た。この塗布液を用い、実施例4と同様に厚み0.05~0.2μmの膜を作製した。上記色素は、ネマチック液晶性を有していたが、配向膜上で結晶化がおこり、異方性を示さなかった。
[Comparative Example 2]
In 99 parts by mass of chloroform, an azo dye No. 1 described in JP-A-11-305036 was prepared. 1 part by mass of (6) was added, and after stirring and dissolving, the mixture was filtered to obtain a dichroic dye composition coating solution. Using this coating solution, a film having a thickness of 0.05 to 0.2 μm was produced in the same manner as in Example 4. The dye had nematic liquid crystal properties, but crystallization occurred on the alignment film and did not show anisotropy.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051

Claims (22)

  1. 下記一般式(I)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素を少なくとも1種含有する二色性色素組成物:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    式中、Ar1~Ar4はそれぞれ置換基を有してもよい、芳香族炭化水素基、芳香族複素環基及びシクロヘキサン環基を表し;L1及びL2はそれぞれ、アゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し、但し、L1とL2が共にアゾ基になることはない。
    Dichroic dye composition containing at least one dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (I):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In the formula, each of Ar 1 to Ar 4 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group and a cyclohexane ring group, each of which may have a substituent; L 1 and L 2 are an azo group and an ester group, respectively. Represents an imino group or a vinylene group, provided that L 1 and L 2 are not both azo groups.
  2. 液晶性の非着色材料を実質的に含有しない請求項1に記載の二色性色素組成物。 The dichroic dye composition according to claim 1, which contains substantially no liquid crystalline non-colored material.
  3. 前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種が、下記一般式(II)で表される化合物である請求項1又は2に記載の二色性色素組成物:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    式中、L11及びL12はそれぞれ、アゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し、但し、L11とL12が共にアゾ基になることはなく;R11~R15はそれぞれ、水素原子もしくは置換基を表し、R11とR13は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A1は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
    The dichroic dye composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein at least one of the dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) is a compound represented by the following general formula (II):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    Wherein, L 11 and L 12 are each, azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group, provided that never L 11 and L 12 is an azo group together; R 11 ~ R 15 each Represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 11 and R 13 may form a ring with each other; A 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  4. 一般式(II)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素を少なくとも2種以上含有し、該2種以上の二色性色素のうち少なくとも1種が、式(II)中、L11がアゾ基である化合物である請求項3に記載の二色性色素組成物。 It contains at least two dichroic dyes having liquid crystallinity represented by the general formula (II), and at least one of the two or more dichroic dyes is L 11 in the formula (II). The dichroic dye composition according to claim 3, wherein is a compound having an azo group.
  5. 前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種が、下記一般式(III)で表される化合物である請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の二色性色素組成物:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    式中、L21はエステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;L22はアゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R21~R25はそれぞれ、水素原子又は置換基を表し、R21とR23は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A2は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
    The dichroic dye according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein at least one of the dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) is a compound represented by the following general formula (III): Composition:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    In the formula, L 21 represents an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; L 22 represents an azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 21 to R 25 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. R 21 and R 23 may form a ring with each other; A 2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  6. 前記一般式(I)で表される二色性色素の少なくとも1種が、下記一般式(IV)で表される化合物である請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の二色性色素組成物:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    式中、L31はイミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R31~R35はそれぞれ水素原子もしくは置換基を表し、R31とR33は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A3は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
    The dichroic dye according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein at least one of the dichroic dyes represented by the general formula (I) is a compound represented by the following general formula (IV): Composition:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    Represents wherein, L 31 is an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 31 ~ R 35 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 31 and R 33 may form a mutually ring; A 3 is a substituted Alternatively, it represents an unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  7. 11、R12、R21、R22、R31及びR32がそれぞれ、炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基であり;R13、R23及びR33がそれぞれ、水素原子であり;R14、R24、R34、R15、R25及びR35がそれぞれ、水素原子、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素原子数1~6の、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基であり;A1、A2及びA3が窒素原子、又は炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい、炭素原子数1~6のアルコキシ基、シアノ基、又は置換アミノ基で置換された炭素原子である請求項4~6のいずれか1項に記載の二色性色素組成物。 R 11 , R 12 , R 21 , R 22 , R 31 and R 32 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; R 13 , R 23 and R 33 are each a hydrogen atom R 14 , R 24 , R 34 , R 15 , R 25 and R 35 each represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a plurality of heteroatoms having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. An alkoxy group which may contain; a carbon atom in which A 1 , A 2 and A 3 may contain a nitrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a plurality of heteroatoms; 7. The dichroic dye composition according to claim 4, which is a carbon atom substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 atoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group.
  8. マゼンタ色素及び/又はイエロー色素として、前記一般式(I)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素を少なくとも1種含有する請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の二色性色素組成物。 The dichroism according to any one of claims 1 to 7, comprising at least one dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the general formula (I) as a magenta dye and / or a yellow dye. Dye composition.
  9. イエロー色素として、請求項5中に記載の一般式(III)で表される化合物の少なくとも1種を含有する請求項8に記載の二色性色素組成物。 The dichroic dye composition according to claim 8, comprising at least one compound represented by formula (III) according to claim 5 as a yellow dye.
  10. マゼンタ色素として、請求項6中に記載の一般式(IV)で表される化合物の少なくとも1種を含有する請求項8又は9に記載の二色性色素組成物。 The dichroic dye composition according to claim 8 or 9, which contains at least one compound represented by formula (IV) according to claim 6 as a magenta dye.
  11. シアン色素として、液晶性を有する二色性アゾ色素の少なくとも1種をさらに含有する請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の二色性色素組成物。 The dichroic dye composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10, further comprising at least one dichroic azo dye having liquid crystallinity as a cyan dye.
  12. 請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の二色性色素組成物からなる偏光膜。 A polarizing film comprising the dichroic dye composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  13. 塗布によって形成される請求項12に記載の偏光膜。 The polarizing film according to claim 12, which is formed by coating.
  14. 光源としてC光源を用いたときの透過光が、xy色度図において、0.28<x<0.36、0.28<y<0.36を満足する請求項13に記載の偏光膜。 The polarizing film according to claim 13, wherein transmitted light when a C light source is used as the light source satisfies 0.28 <x <0.36 and 0.28 <y <0.36 in the xy chromaticity diagram.
  15. 一対の基板と、その間に配置された、液晶層、カラーフィルタ層、及び請求項12~14のいずれか1項に記載の偏光膜を有する液晶セル。 A liquid crystal cell comprising a pair of substrates, a liquid crystal layer, a color filter layer, and the polarizing film according to any one of claims 12 to 14 disposed therebetween.
  16. 前記偏光膜を、前記カラーフィルタ層と前記液晶層との間に有する請求項15に記載の液晶セル。 The liquid crystal cell according to claim 15, wherein the polarizing film is provided between the color filter layer and the liquid crystal layer.
  17. 請求項12~14のいずれか1項に記載の偏光膜を有する表示装置。 A display device comprising the polarizing film according to any one of claims 12 to 14.
  18. 請求項15又は16に記載の液晶セルを有する液晶表示装置。 A liquid crystal display device comprising the liquid crystal cell according to claim 15.
  19. 下記一般式(III)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    式中、L21はエステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;L22はアゾ基、エステル基、イミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R11~R15はそれぞれ、水素原子又は置換基を表し、R11とR13は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A2は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
    A dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (III):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    In the formula, L 21 represents an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; L 22 represents an azo group, an ester group, an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 11 to R 15 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. R 11 and R 13 may form a ring with each other; A 2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  20. 21及びR22がそれぞれ、炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基であり;R23がそれぞれ、水素原子であり;R24及びR25がそれぞれ、水素原子、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素原子数1~6の、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基であり;A2が窒素原子、又は炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい、炭素原子数1~6のアルコキシ基、シアノ基、又は置換アミノ基で置換された炭素原子である請求項19に記載の二色性色素。 R 21 and R 22 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; R 23 is a hydrogen atom; R 24 and R 25 are a hydrogen atom and 1 carbon atom, respectively. An alkyl group having 6 to 6 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms; A 2 is a nitrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms The dichroic dye according to claim 19, which is a carbon atom substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group, which may contain a group or a plurality of heteroatoms.
  21. 下記一般式(IV)で表される、液晶性を有する二色性色素:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    式中、L31はイミノ基、又はビニレン基を表し;R31~R35はそれぞれ水素原子もしくは置換基を表し、R31とR33は互いに環を形成していてもよく;A3は置換もしくは無置換の炭素原子、又は窒素原子を表す。
    A dichroic dye having liquid crystallinity represented by the following general formula (IV):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    Represents wherein, L 31 is an imino group, or a vinylene group; R 31 ~ R 35 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 31 and R 33 may form a mutually ring; A 3 is a substituted Alternatively, it represents an unsubstituted carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  22. 31及びR32がそれぞれ、炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基であり;R33が、水素原子であり;R34及びR35がそれぞれ、水素原子、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素原子数1~6の、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルコキシ基であり;A3が窒素原子、又は炭素原子数1~6の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、複数のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい、炭素原子数1~6のアルコキシ基、シアノ基、又は置換アミノ基で置換された炭素原子である請求項21に記載の二色性色素。 R 31 and R 32 are each a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; R 33 is a hydrogen atom; R 34 and R 35 are each a hydrogen atom, 1 to An alkyl group having 6 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms; A 3 is a nitrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms The dichroic dye according to claim 21, which is a carbon atom substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, or a substituted amino group, which may contain a plurality of heteroatoms.
PCT/JP2010/064468 2009-08-28 2010-08-26 Dichroic dye composition, polarizing film, liquid crystal cells and display devices WO2011024891A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2009199090A JP5437744B2 (en) 2009-08-28 2009-08-28 Dichroic dye composition, polarizing film, liquid crystal cell, and display device
JP2009-199090 2009-08-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011024891A1 true WO2011024891A1 (en) 2011-03-03

Family

ID=43627990

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2010/064468 WO2011024891A1 (en) 2009-08-28 2010-08-26 Dichroic dye composition, polarizing film, liquid crystal cells and display devices

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP5437744B2 (en)
TW (1) TW201127943A (en)
WO (1) WO2011024891A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011157614A1 (en) 2010-06-14 2011-12-22 Basf Se Black dichroic dye
CN103336325A (en) * 2012-02-28 2013-10-02 住友化学株式会社 Polarizing film, circular polarizing plate and method of producing the same
EP2728388A1 (en) * 2012-11-06 2014-05-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Polarizing film, anti-reflective film and display device
WO2020156832A1 (en) * 2019-02-01 2020-08-06 Basf Se Dichroic azo-azomethine dyes for liquid crystal compositions
CN113490871A (en) * 2019-03-01 2021-10-08 三菱化学株式会社 Composition for forming anisotropic dye film, and optical element

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9207359B2 (en) 2012-11-07 2015-12-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Polarizing film and display device including the polarizing film
US9194980B2 (en) 2012-11-07 2015-11-24 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Polarizing film and display device including the polarizing film
JP6225357B2 (en) 2012-12-14 2017-11-08 エルジー・ケム・リミテッド Polymerizable composition (POLYMERIZABLECOMPOSITION)
US11822108B2 (en) 2017-04-07 2023-11-21 Fujifilm Corporation Polarizing element, circularly polarizing plate, and image display device
JP6811846B2 (en) 2017-04-07 2021-01-13 富士フイルム株式会社 Polarizing element, circular polarizing plate and image display device
WO2019131943A1 (en) 2017-12-28 2019-07-04 富士フイルム株式会社 Optical laminate manufacturing method, optical laminate, and image display device
WO2019131976A1 (en) 2017-12-28 2019-07-04 富士フイルム株式会社 Light-absorbing anisotropic film, optical layered product, and image display device
JP7027531B2 (en) 2018-04-17 2022-03-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Polarizing element, circular polarizing plate and image display device
WO2020045216A1 (en) 2018-08-28 2020-03-05 富士フイルム株式会社 Layered body and image display device

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6229477B2 (en) * 1977-08-18 1987-06-26 Gen Electric
JPH0517275B2 (en) * 1982-02-10 1993-03-08 Hitachi Seisakusho Kk
JPH0613703B2 (en) * 1982-06-30 1994-02-23 三菱化成株式会社 Guest-host type liquid crystal composition
JPH0867879A (en) * 1994-08-31 1996-03-12 Mitsubishi Chem Corp Liquid crystal composition and liquid crystal element
JPH1060446A (en) * 1996-08-23 1998-03-03 Mitsubishi Chem Corp Dichromatic coloring matter, liquid crystal composition and liquid crystal element
JP2010150513A (en) * 2008-09-30 2010-07-08 Fujifilm Corp Dichroic dye composition, light-absorbable anisotropic film, and polarizing element
JP2010152351A (en) * 2008-11-28 2010-07-08 Fujifilm Corp Polarizing element and method of producing the same

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6229477B2 (en) * 1977-08-18 1987-06-26 Gen Electric
JPH0517275B2 (en) * 1982-02-10 1993-03-08 Hitachi Seisakusho Kk
JPH0613703B2 (en) * 1982-06-30 1994-02-23 三菱化成株式会社 Guest-host type liquid crystal composition
JPH0867879A (en) * 1994-08-31 1996-03-12 Mitsubishi Chem Corp Liquid crystal composition and liquid crystal element
JPH1060446A (en) * 1996-08-23 1998-03-03 Mitsubishi Chem Corp Dichromatic coloring matter, liquid crystal composition and liquid crystal element
JP2010150513A (en) * 2008-09-30 2010-07-08 Fujifilm Corp Dichroic dye composition, light-absorbable anisotropic film, and polarizing element
JP2010152351A (en) * 2008-11-28 2010-07-08 Fujifilm Corp Polarizing element and method of producing the same

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
M.MATSUI ET AL.: "Synthesis of fluorine-containing disazo dyes extended with ester linkages and their application to guest-host liquid crystal displays", LIQUID CRYSTALS, vol. 23, no. 2, 1997, pages 217 - 225, XP000701490, DOI: doi:10.1080/026782997208479 *
M.MATSUI ET AL.: "Synthesis of perfluorobutyl-substituted ester-disazo dyes and their application to guest-host liquid crystal displays", LIQUID CRYSTALS, vol. 29, no. 5, 2002, pages 707 - 712, XP001102377, DOI: doi:10.1080/02678290210129920 *

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011157614A1 (en) 2010-06-14 2011-12-22 Basf Se Black dichroic dye
US9057020B2 (en) 2010-06-14 2015-06-16 Basf Se Black dichroic dye
CN103336325A (en) * 2012-02-28 2013-10-02 住友化学株式会社 Polarizing film, circular polarizing plate and method of producing the same
CN103336325B (en) * 2012-02-28 2017-04-12 住友化学株式会社 Polarizing film, circular polarizing plate and method of producing the same
EP2728388A1 (en) * 2012-11-06 2014-05-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Polarizing film, anti-reflective film and display device
US9250371B2 (en) 2012-11-06 2016-02-02 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Polarizing film, anti-reflective film and display device including the same
WO2020156832A1 (en) * 2019-02-01 2020-08-06 Basf Se Dichroic azo-azomethine dyes for liquid crystal compositions
CN113366063A (en) * 2019-02-01 2021-09-07 巴斯夫欧洲公司 Dichroic azo-azomethine dyes for liquid crystal compositions
US20220098412A1 (en) * 2019-02-01 2022-03-31 Basf Se Dichroic azo-azomethine dyes for liquid crystal compositions
JP7447134B2 (en) 2019-02-01 2024-03-11 ベーアーエスエフ・エスエー Dichroic azo-azomethine dyes for liquid crystal compositions
CN113490871A (en) * 2019-03-01 2021-10-08 三菱化学株式会社 Composition for forming anisotropic dye film, and optical element

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201127943A (en) 2011-08-16
JP5437744B2 (en) 2014-03-12
JP2011046904A (en) 2011-03-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5437744B2 (en) Dichroic dye composition, polarizing film, liquid crystal cell, and display device
WO2011024892A1 (en) Dichroic dye, light-absorbable anisotropic film, polarizer and process for production thereof, and display device
JP5412225B2 (en) Dichroic dye composition, light absorption anisotropic film, and polarizing element
JP5612291B2 (en) Polarizing element having light absorption anisotropic film using dichroic dye composition
JP6059698B2 (en) Polarizing element, method for manufacturing the same, and liquid crystal display device
WO2011024890A1 (en) Laminated polarizer, color filter, and display device
JP5566160B2 (en) Liquid crystal compound, liquid crystal composition, light absorption anisotropic film, and liquid crystal display device
JP5427449B2 (en) Light absorbing anisotropic film using dichroic dye composition, polarizing element, method for producing the polarizer, and liquid crystal display device
JP4721747B2 (en) Polymer film, liquid crystal alignment film, retardation plate, and liquid crystal display device
JP2011048309A (en) Method of manufacturing polarizer, method of manufacturing laminated body, and display device
JP5112147B2 (en) Polarizing element and manufacturing method of polarizing element
US20230314854A1 (en) Light absorption anisotropic film, viewing angle control system, and image display device
JP5554592B2 (en) Dichroic dye composition, light absorption anisotropic film, polarizer and method for producing the same, display device, and isothiazole azo compound
JP5604151B2 (en) Dichroic dye composition, light absorption anisotropic film, polarizer, method for producing the same, and display device
JP2010230924A (en) Method for manufacturing light absorption anisotropic film and light absorption anisotropic film
JP5451261B2 (en) Dichroic dye composition, light absorption anisotropic film, polarizing element and liquid crystal display device using the same
JP2010215846A (en) Dichroic dye composition
US20240142685A1 (en) Optical film, manufacturing method of light absorption anisotropic layer, and image display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 10811940

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 10811940

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1